Sei sulla pagina 1di 256

Proximity Switches

2/ 2 2/ 3 2/ 28 2/28 2/3 0 2/3 2 2/ 34 2/3 4 2/3 8 2/4 1 2/4 3 2/ 45 2/4 5 2/4 9 2/5 1 2/ 54 2/5 4 2/ 59 2/5 9 2/6 1 2/ 65 2/6 5 2/ 67 2/6 7 2/6 9

I n trod u ction Son ar p roximity switches SI M ATI C PX S100 C o mp a c t ra ng e K 0 3 SG 16 c o mp a c t ty p e So na r th ru -b ea m senso r SI M ATI C PX S200 C o mp a c t ra ng e M 3 0 K 1 C o mp a c t ra ng e M 18S C o mp a c t ra ng e K 21 K 08 c o mp a c t fo rm SI M ATI C PX S300 C o mp a c t ra ng e M 3 0 K 2 C o mp a c t ra ng e M 18 K 6 5 c o mp a c t fo rm SI M ATI C PX S400 C o mp a c t ra ng e M 3 0 K 3 SI M ATI C PX S800 C o mp a c t ra ng e M 18 A T E X C o mp a c t ra ng e M 3 0 K 3 ATEX SI M ATI C PX S900 D o u b le-la y er sh eet mo nito ring A ccessories SO N P R O G interfa c e d ev ic e M o u nting a c c esso ries 2/ 70 2/ 86 2/86 2/87 2/88 2/ 90 2/9 0 2/9 2 2/9 3 2/ 95 2/9 5 2/9 7 2/9 8 2/9 9 O p to p roximity switches SI M ATI C PX O 100 D 4 fo rm M 5 fo rm M 12 fo rm SI M ATI C PX O 200 M 18S fo rm M 18 fo rm L 18 fo rm SI M ATI C PX O 300 K 21, K 21R fo rms K 20 fo rm L 20 fo rm SIM A T IC P X O 3 7 0 C 20 2/ 130 I n d u ctive p roximity switches 2/ 152 SI M ATI C PX I 200 2/15 2 O p era ting d ista nc e 0.6 -0.8 mm 2/15 4 O p era ting d ista nc e 1-4 mm 2/16 8 O p era ting d ista nc e 5 -10 mm 2/17 5 O p era ting d ista nc e 15 -20 mm 2/180 O p era ting d ista nc e 3 0-4 0 mm 2/ 181 SI M ATI C PX I 300 2/181 O p era ting d ista nc e 0.6 -1 mm 2/182 O p era ting d ista nc e 2-4 mm 2/19 3 O p era ting d ista nc e 5 -12 mm 2/203 O p era ting d ista nc e 15 -22 mm 2/214 O p era ting d ista nc e 25 -4 0 mm 2/223 O p era ting d ista nc e 5 0-6 5 mm 2/ 224 SI M ATI C PX I 400 2/224 O p era ting d ista nc e 1.5 -10 mm 2/23 0 O p era ting d ista nc e 12-20 mm 2/23 3 O p era ting d ista nc e 25 -7 5 mm 2/ 236 SI M ATI C PX I 600 2/23 6 O p era ting d ista nc e 2-4 mm 2/23 7 O p era ting d ista nc e 5 -8 mm 2/23 8 O p era ting d ista nc e 10-3 5 mm 2/ 240 SI M ATI C PX I 900 2/24 0 O p era ting d ista nc e 3 mm, ex p lo sio n-p ro o f to 5 00 b a r 2/24 1 O p era ting d ista nc e 0 to 6 mm w ith a na lo g o u tp u t 2/ 242 C ap acitive p roximity switches 2/ 245 SI M ATI C PX C 200 2/24 5 10 ... 6 5 V D C 2/24 7 0 ... 25 0 V A C 2 2/ 248 A ccessories for al l p roximity switches 2/24 8 C o nnec to rs 2/25 4 D istrib u to rs 2/25 5 Senso rs a ssemb ly sy stem 2/25 6 A ssemb ly ma teria ls

2/ 100 SI M ATI C PX O 400 2/100 K 3 1 ty p e o f c o nstru c tio n 2/102 K 3 0 fo rm 2/ 104 2/104 2/106 2/108 SI M ATI C PX O 500 C 4 0 fo rm L 5 0 fo rm L 5 0 H F, L 5 0H F a d v a nc ed ty p e o f c o nstru c tio n 2/110 SIM A T IC P X O 5 6 0 C 5 0

2/ 111 SI M ATI C PX O 600 2/111 K 80 fo rm 2/115 L 80H F ty p e o f c o nstru c tio n 2/117 SIM A T IC P X O 6 5 0 L 9 0L 2/ 119 SI M ATI C PX O 800 2/119 SIM A T IC P X O 83 0 G L 2/121 SIM A T IC P X O 84 0 L V 7 0 2/ 123 A ccessories 2/123 P la stic fib er-o p tic c o nd u c to r 2/126 M o u nting b ra c k et 2/128 R eflec to rs

Siemens FS 10 2008

Proximity Switches
Introduction
Proximity switches for reliab le sensing , counting , measurement or monitoring
Automation solutions are becoming more and more extensive and processes are more complex than ever before. Total control of all processes is therefore more important than ever. To maintain an overview here, it is essential to deploy all the available senses optimally. Proximity switches offer ideal characteristics for this for sensing, counting, measuring and positioning. W hatever the application or sector, the complete product range can always provide just the right feel for the job.

H ig h lig h t s
Contactless detection of objects Extensive and complete product range including photoelectric, inductive, sonar and capacitive sensors International versions (U L/CSA) U p to degree of protection IP69K, depending on type of sensor Integrated in Totally Integrated Automation with IQ -Sense

Sonar proximity switches Sonar proximity switches can be used as non-contact proximity switches in many fields of automation. W henever distances through air have to be evaluated, these devices can be used, because they not only detect objects, but can also output and evaluate the absolute distance between the Sonar proximity switches and the object. Changing environmental conditions (e.g. temperature variations) are compensated during evaluation of the measurement.

O pto proximity switches The photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the received q uantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected. Depending on the type of B ERO, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated.

I nd u ctive proximity switches Inductive proximity switches are the low-cost solution for non-contact detection of metal objects. Inductive proximity switches are extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long service life thanks to no-wear operation as well as their insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water.

C apacitive proximity switches Capacitive proximity switches are also non-contact sensors for measuring conducting and non-conducting materials in solid, powder or liq uid state.

Total l y integ rated in T I A IQ -Sense is a concept for the intelligent integration of sensors in automation systems. J ust like all products and systems incorporated in Totally Integrated Automation, IQ -Sense devices also feature the same properties with respect to communications capability, data management and configuration/programming. This provides advantages in every aspect, and not just enormous savings potential for engineering. For the first time, plant-wide communication down to the sensor level can be implemented not just extremely easily, but highly profitably as well.

2/2

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch

Sonar proximity switches from 6 cm to 10 m they hear everything!

P X S series The ultrasonic proximity switches are organiz ed in different product families in accordance with their technical version and design:
SIMATIC Sensors F orm

PXS100 PXS200 PXS300 PXS400 PXS800 PXS900

Compact range K0, compact form 3SG16, sonar thru-beam sensor Compact range M30 K1, compact range M18S, compact range K21, compact form K08 Compact range M30 K2, compact range M18, compact form K65 Compact range M30 K3 Compact range M18 ATEX, compact range M30 K3 ATEX Double-layer sheet monitoring

I Application
The Sonar proximity switches detect objects in different materials, shapes, colors or consistencies with absolute precision, flexibility and reliability. The range of applications is almost limitless. In fill-level or height sensing, distance measurement or bottle counting at distances from 3 cm to 10 m, they detect objects with widely differing characteristics. Regardless of whether they are liquid, solid, powder or even transparent. The nature of the surfaces is irrelevant, they can be rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry. The proximity switches are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration, ambient light or ambient noise. The wide range of areas of application for the Sonar proximity switch ultrasonic sensors gives full rein to the imagination: Fill level and height sensing Spacing measurement Winding diameter sensing Bottle counting, and much more. The Sonar proximity switches are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration and ambient noise. Applications in food processing For use in contact with food or corrosive chemicals, on request, the ultrasonic sensors can be protected with Teflon film and supplied in a stainless-steel enclosure. Ob j ects Using ultrasonic technology, Sonar proximity switches can detect objects of any kind, this includes liquids, powders or granulates, and colored or transparent objects. Whether the surface of the object is rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry is of no consequence. Even at a maximum operating distance, all level or smooth surfaces can be reliably detected up to an angular variation of approximately 3 from the sound cone. Depending on the peakto-valley height of the object, the angular variation may also be higher. As a rule, the objects can enter the sound cone from any direction. Sensors for E x Z one 2/ 22 These sonar proximity switches are approved according to EU Guideline 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII The approval is for: Gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X and Dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C X The functionality of the sonar proximity switches with ATEX approval is identical to that of the standard proximity switches. P ersonal safety Due to their physical characteristics, the ultrasonic proximity switches cannot be used for safety-related applications (e.g. for the protection of personnel).
NSD0_00801

Highlights
Measurement accurate to the millimeter Color and material-independent, even transparent objects Individual parameter setting Small, compact housing (M18S) Very high degree of repeat accuracy Can be used all over the world: UL/CSA approvals Sensors available for Ex Z one 2/22 Insensitive to temperature, noise, light or water Sensors with IQ-Sense

Configurator A configurator for sonar proximity switches is available in the A& D Mall. Based on the technical features required, the desired product can be quickly and easily selected, placed in the shopping cart and ordered. A configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering can be found under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/3

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Application examples

2
Size measurement Quality control

Measurement of stack height

Distance monitoring

Measurement of diameter and speed

Level measurements

Contour measurement

Loop monitoring

2/4

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch

I D esign
Mounting Sonar proximity switches can be operated in any mounting position. Mounting positions in which deposits can settle on the transducer surface must however be avoided. The best results are obtained if the Sonar proximity switches are aligned such that the ultrasound waves hit the object as near to the vertical as possible. If this is not possible (e.g. in the case of bulk material), the maximum possible range must be determined experimentally. This depends on the material, surface and alignment of the objects. To prevent undesirable reflections, the distance a must be maintained from disturbing objects around the axis of the sound cone. Between the sound cone axis and a smooth wall running in parallel to it, the distance b must be maintained to prevent disturbing reflections. The distance c must be maintained to ensure that no objects enter the blind zone (see sound cones). Mounting multiple sensors Mutual interference between Sonar proximity switches that can result in spurious signals is excluded by maintaining sufficient distances between the sensors or an appropriate alignment. If two Sonar proximity switches of an identical design are mounted opposite each other, the distance d must be maintained between them. If two sensors of identical design are arranged in parallel, the distance e must be maintained between the sensors. To avoid mutual interference (cf. function), proximity switches of compact ranges K0, M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 can be synchronized or operated in multiplex mode. F ouling The range of the proximity switch is reduced if the transducer surface is damaged or painted or if water or wet dirt is applied to it.
e

Clearance a around the axis of the sound cone: keep space free of objects

a a

So u n d c o n e

NSD00748a

So n ar p ro x im ity s w itc h

Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000

cm > 6 > 30 > 60 > 90 > 150

Distance b between two Sonar proximity switches and a smooth surface Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000 b

So u n d c o n e

NSD0_00749

So n ar p ro x im ity s w itc h

> > > > >

cm 3 15 30 40 70

Distance d between two Sonar proximity switches mounted opposite each other with the same sensing range

NSD0_00747a

So u n d c o n e So n ar p ro x im ity s w itc h

Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000

cm > 120 > 400 > 1200 > 2500 > 4000

Distance e between two Sonar proximity switches arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object perpendicular to the axis of the sound cone
So u n d c o n e
NSD0_00745 a

Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000

cm > 15 > 60 > 150 > 250 > 350

So n ar p ro x im ity s w itc h

O bjec t

Distance e between two Sonar proximity switches arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object with unfavorable orientation The distance e must be experimentally determined depending on the angle between the object and the Sonar proximity switch.
O bjec t

So u n d c o n e
NSD00746 a

So n ar p ro x im ity s w itc h

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/5

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch

I Function
The Sonar proximity switches only operate through the medium of air and can detect any objects that reflect ultrasound. The sensors emit ultrasonic pulses cyclically. When an object reflects these pulses, the generated echo is received and converted into an electrical signal. The incoming echo is detected in accordance with its intensity which, in turn, is dependent on the distance between the object and the Sonar proximity switch.
7

Active measurement system: The propagation time of the ultrasonic signal from the emitter to the receiver is measured. The enabling inputs of the two proximity switches must be connected together for this purpose. All options of the proximity switches can still be used; the range is twice the normal range.

Emitter and receiver This is the normal operating mode of the Sonar proximity switch; it operates as a typical proximity switch. 7 Diffuse sensor: In this case, the object that is to be detected acts as a reflector. As soon as an object enters the preset operating range, the echo from this object causes the output signal of the proximity switch to change.
O p e ra tin g ra n g e

The Sonar proximity switches operate according to the echo propagation principle, i.e. the time difference between the emitted pulse and the echo pulse is evaluated. The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons. Resolution The resolution is the smallest change in the distance to the object that is necessary for a change in the output of the BERO. The internal resolution is 256 or 4096 steps. If values are entered during programming that exceed this resolution, the program will automatically correct them. The corrected values will be displayed in a window with a message. Example Sonar proximity switch 3RG6014..... (60 to 600 cm) For a sensing range 60 to 600 cm, this results in a resolution of 1.3 mm: 6000 mm 600 mm = 5400 mm 5400 mm/4096 = 1.3 mm (12 bit) If the measuring range is restricted, the step size is reduced because the distance that is split up into 4096 steps has reduced. The smallest step size is, however, limited to 1 mm by the electronics. If the sensing range is restricted, the resolution is enhanced. Temperature compensation The Sonar proximity switches of compact ranges M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 are fitted with temperature sensors and a compensation circuit that equalizes changes in operating distances caused by temperature changes. Compensation can be performed throughout the temperature range. This means that an absolute precision of + /- 1.5% (compact ranges M30 K2 and M30 K3) or of + /- 2.5% (compact range M18) is achieved. Operating modes with switching output The Sonar proximity switches with switching output can be used in the following modes depending on their type. Only emitter, only receiver Two Sonar proximity switches are required in each case for this operating mode. One is parameterized as a receiver and the other is parameterized as the emitter. There are two possible applications: 7 Thru-beam sensor: It is only evaluated whether an object lies between the proximity switches. The range is twice the normal range. Adjustment of the operating range and evaluation of the analog output is not relevant in this case.
NSD0_01204a

O b je ct n o t d e te cte d , sw itch in g o u tp u t n o t a ctive

O p e ra tin g ra n g e
NSD0_01202

O b je ct d e te cte d , sw itch in g o u tp u t a ctive

Reflex sensor: In this case, a permanently fixed reflector (e.g. a small metal plate) is mounted opposite the proximity switch. The operating range is adjusted to this reflector. If the path between the proximity switch and the reflector is interrupted, the sensor no longer detects the reflector and this triggers a change in the signal at the switching output.
Se t o p e ratin g ran g e

R e fle cto r d e te cte d , sw itch in g o u tp u t active

Se t o p e ratin g ran g e

R e fle cto r h id d e n b y o b je ct, sw itch in g o u tp u t n o t active


NSD0_01203 a

E m itte r

O b je c t

R e c e ive r

O b je c t d e te c te d , sw itc h in g o u tp u t n o t ac tive

2/6

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Synchronization In compact ranges K0, M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18, several devices can be synchronized with each other by simply interconnecting the synchronization outputs of the devices (Pin 2 for NO function, Pin 4 for NC function). Up to 10 devices can be synchronized (or 6 devices in the case of compact range 0). This allows the sensors to be mounted extremely close to each other in many cases without causing mutual interference. Advantages No additional wiring overheads, simply connect the enable inputs of the individual proximity switches. Fast response, because every proximity switch is constantly active. Disadvantages The object cannot be assigned to a particular proximity switch. Example Two Sonar proximity switches are mounted at a clearance e that is smaller than the minimum clearance (see mounting guidelines). An object is located in their common sound field. The echo from B2 can reach B1 by reflection (GB). Mutual interference can occur. The object is detected from the two echoes E1 and E2 by Sonar proximity switches B1 and B2. If the two devices are synchronized, there may be no mutual interference, because for example, echo E1 arrives after echo E2 at proximity switch B2. The devices only ever respond to the first echo. Example: Recognition of narrow objects Narrow objects are to be recognized and it shall be determined whether one, two or no objects are present.
B2 E1

G B
NSD0_01195a

B1 E2

In this example, echo GB would cause proximity switch B1 to mistakenly detect an object. Synchronization of the proximity switches would not help here because echo pulse E2 would not arrive until after echo GB at proximity switch B1 and a proximity switch only ever detects the first echo. In this example, a PLC must be used to switch cyclically to and fro between the two proximity switches. Internal multiplex mode The Sonar proximity switches of compact ranges K0, M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 can be interconnected to form a network. Up to 10 devices (or 6 devices in the case of compact range 0) can be operated in series or parallel (see "Synchronization"). No additional electronics is required. The enable inputs of all the proximity switches are simply connected together. On programming, each device is informed about the number of proximity switches in the network as well as its own position (address) in the network. When they have been wired up and the supply voltage has been connected, the proximity switches automatically operate in multiplex mode.

E2 B2

G B

e B1

E1

Multiplex function External multiplex mode The fourth connection can be used as an external enabling input. This can be used to switch the Sonar proximity switch to active or inactive using an external control without the need to switch the supply voltage on and off. An external multiplex mode can be configured when Sonar proximity switches have to be switched on and off in sequence via the enabling input. In this case, it is ensured that the Sonar proximity switches will not interfere with each other. In contrast to internal multiplex mode, more than 10 Sonar proximity switches can be operated in multiplex mode. Connection of the enable input: Sonar proximity switch active, Enable input XI at L+ or open. Sonar proximity switch inactive, enable input XI at 0 V to 3 V DC Advantages Reliable protection against mutual interference. An object can be assigned to a proximity switch. Disadvantages Additional connection overheads (e.g. a PLC). Longer response time than for a synchronization circuit because each proximity switch is only active briefly and then has to wait until all the other proximity switches in the circuit have emitted.
Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD0_01194a

2/7

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
SONPROG programming device Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device and the relevant software, the Sonar proximity switches of compact ranges M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements. The device is an interface for the following tasks: Checking the parameters of the Sonar proximity switch Modifying the parameters of the Sonar proximity switch Aligning the Sonar proximity switch to the application.
SONPROG

This enables a Sonar proximity switch to be optimized specifically for an application. The adjustments found can be saved or printed out to facilitate maintenance and documentation of the equipment. When a Sonar proximity switch has been replaced, the new device can be programmed with the saved data quickly and easily. No new adjustments are necessary. The main parameters that can be set are Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Attenuation. The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Diffuse or reflex sensor. For a detailed description of the possible settings, see "SONPROG PC interface", page 2/67. Adjustment with potentiometers The potentiometers are used to select the required limits (min. or max.) of the switching range.

2/8

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch

I Schematics
Synchronization
NO function
L+ L Synchroniz ation cable
NSD0 01196
NSD0 01197

NC function
L+ L Synchroniz ation cable

L+ XI L

L+ XI L

L+ NC L

L+ NC

3 4 NO

3 4 NO

3 4 XI

L 3 4 XI

External multiplex mode


NO function
L+ L
NSD0 01198

NC function
L+ L

L+ 1 XI 2 3 L 4 NO

1 2 XI 3 L

L+
P LC 50 mA

NSD0 01199

L+ 1 NC 2 3 L 4 XI

1 2 NC 3 L 4 XI

L+
P LC 50 mA P LC 50 mA

4 NO

P LC 50 mA

Internal multiplex mode (analog output)


NO function
L+ L Synchroniz ation cable
NSD0 01200

NC function
L+ L Synchroniz ation cable
NSD0 01201

1 2 3 4 5

L+ XI L NO I a / Ua

1 2 3 4 5

L+ XI L NO I a / Ua

1 2 3 4 5

L+ NC L XI I a / Ua

1 2 3 4 5

L+ NC L XI I a / Ua

I Characteristic curves
Sound cones The following diagrams are the results of measurements with Sonar proximity switches, with their production-dependent scatter, at room conditions (20C). Standard reflectors moved radially are detected within the possible sensing range by the Sonar proximity switches. The diagrams apply to the individual types of sensor for the defined reflectors and for larger reflectors. Measurement 1 with an aligned object, with the most optimum reflection keep environment free of objects which should not be detected. Measurement 2 with an object which has partially aligned surfaces detection of round materials and plates with rounded edges. Measurement 3 with an object with a plane surface moving perpendicularly to the sound cone detection of plane surfaces and edges. Defined reflectors: Measurements 1, 3: plane object - 2 cm 2 cm, for sensors with sensing ranges up to 130 cm - 10 cm 10 cm, for sensors with larger sensing ranges Measurement 2: cylindrical object, 8 cm diameter. The following pages show the sound cones for the following designs: Compact range 0, K08 Sonar thru-beam sensor Compact range K65 Compact range M18, M18S Compact range M30 K1, M30 K2 and M30 K3

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/9

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Compact range 0, sensing range 6 ... 30 cm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
12 9 S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 4 0 Ob j e c t d i s t a n c e i n c m
N S D 01207

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m M a x im u m
N S D 01208

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 0 5 A ve r a g e M a x im u m M in im u m
N S D 01209

M a x im u m Av e r a g e M in im u m
BE R O

Ob j e c t

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 4 0 O b j e c t di s t a n c e i n c m M in im u m Av e r a g e
BE R O

B E R O

- 12

- 12

- 12

10 15 20 25 30 35 4 0 O b j e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Compact range 0, sensing range 20 ... 100 cm


Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
36 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01210

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0


36 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m
N S D 01211

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0


36 24 Ob j e c t S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m 12 0 - 12 - 24 - 36 0 20 4 0 6 0 8 0 100 120 M in im u m
N S D 01212

A ve r a g e M a x im u m M in im u m
B E R O

A ve r a g e M a x im u m

A ve r a g e M a x im u m

12 0 - 12 - 24 - 36 0 20 4 0 60

Ob j e c t

12 0 - 12 - 24 - 36 0 20 4 0 60 8 0 100 120 M in im u m
BERO

8 0

100 120

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Compact range K 65, sensing range 25 ... 250 cm


Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
90 60
N S D 01 2 6 1

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0


90 60 O b je c t S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m 30 0 -30 -6 0 -9 0 0 60 120 180 240 300 M in im u m M a x im u m A v e ra g e
N S D 01 2 6 2

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0


90
N S D 01 2 6 2

M a x im u m A v e ra g e

O b je c t
BER O

30 0 -30 -6 0 -9 0 0 60 120 180 240 300 M in im u m


BER O

O g g e tto
BER O

L a rg h e z z a d e l c o n o u ltra s o n ic o

60 30 0 -30 -6 0 -9 0 0 60

S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m

m a s s im a m e d ia

m in im a

120

180

240

300

O b je c t d is ta n c e in c m

O b je c t d is ta n c e in c m

D is ta n z a d e ll'o g g e tto

Sonar thru-beam sensor, sensing ranges 5 ... 40 cm, 5 ... 80 cm, 5 ... 150 cm
Receiver angle 0
30 20 in c m
E m itte r R e c e iv e r E m itte r R e c e iv e r
N SD 0

Variable receiver angle, optimally aligned


30 20 in c m 10 0 S o u n d c o n e w id th -1 0 -2 0 -30 0 50 1 00 150 2 00
N S D 01

10 0

S o u n d c o n e w id th

-1 0 -2 0 -30 0 50 1 00 150 2 00

D is ta n c e e m itte r to re c e iv e r in c m

D is ta n c e e m itte r to re c e iv e r in c m

2/10

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
KM 18 co m p act ran g e, sen si n g ran g e 5 . . . 30 cm
M ea su rement 1 (mo st o p timu m reflec tio n), a ttenu a tio n 0
12 9 Average
NSD 01266

M ea su rement 2 (c y lind ric a l o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 0


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 4 0 5 0 60 7 0 M in im u m
N S D 0 012 67

M ea su rement 3 (p la ne o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 0


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 0 012 68

Sound cone width in cm

Object
BERO

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12

Maximum

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

M a x im u m Av e r a g e M in im u m

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 0 10 2 0 30

Minimum

B E R O

10

20

30

40 50 60

70

- 12

4 0 5 0 60

7 0

Object distance in cm

Ob j e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Ob j e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

M ea su rement 1 (mo st o p timu m reflec tio n), a ttenu a tio n 2


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 4 0 5 0 60 7 0 Av e r a g e M a x im u m
N S D0 012 69

M ea su rement 2 (c y lind ric a l o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 2


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D0 012 7 0

M ea su rement 3 (p la ne o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 2


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m M a x im u m A ve r a g e Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 4 0 5 0 60 7 0 M a x im u m A ve r a g e M in im u m
N S D0 012 7 1

M in im u m

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 M in im u m

B E R O

BE R O

4 0 5 0 60

7 0

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

M ea su rement 1 (mo st o p timu m reflec tio n), a ttenu a tio n 4


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 5 10 15 2 0 2 5 30 35 4 0 M a x im u m A ve r a g e
N S D 012 7 2

M ea su rement 2 (c y lind ric a l o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 4


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m Ob j e c t
B E R O
N S D 0 012 7 3

M ea su rement 3 (p la ne o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 4


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 5 10 15 2 0 2 5 30 35 4 0 M in im u m M a x im u m Av e r a g e
N S D0 012 7 4

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

M in im u m

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 5 10 15 2 0 2 5 30 35 4 0 M in im u m
BE R O

B E R O

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Ob j e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

M ea su rement 1 (mo st o p timu m reflec tio n), a ttenu a tio n 6


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t
B E R O
N S D0 012 7 5

M ea su rement 2 (c y lind ric a l o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 6

M ea su rement 3 (p la ne o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 6


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m
N S D0 012 7 7

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 5

M a x im u m Av e r a g e
BE R O

Ob j e c t

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 5 10 15

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

Insu ffic ient sensitiv ity


M in im u m

M in im u m

10 15

2 0 2 5

30 35

4 0

2 0 2 5

30 35

4 0

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/ 11

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
M18 compact range, sensing range 15 ... 100 cm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m Ob j e c t
B E R O
N S D 01 21 3

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m Ob j e c t 1 2 0 M in im u m M a x im u m Av e r a g e
N S D 01 21 4

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0


3 6 24 Ob j e c t
B E R O
N S D 01 21 5

S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

M a x im u m Av e r a g e M in im u m

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0 1 20 1 6 0 200 M in im u m
BE R O

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0 1 20

-1 2

- 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0 1 20 1 6 0 200

1 6 0

200

Ob j e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 2


36 Sound cone width in cm 24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 40 80 120 160 200 Minimum Maximum Average
NSD 01216

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 2


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01 21 7

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 2


3 6 24 Ob j e c t
B E R O
N S D 01 21 8

Object

S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

M a x im u m A ve r a g e M in im u m

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0 1 20 1 6 0 200 M in im u m

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0 1 20

BERO

1 6 0

200

Object distance in cm

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 20 40 6 0 8 0 1 00 1 20 1 40 M in im u m M a x im u m A ve r a g e
N S D 01 21 9

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 4


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m 1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 20 40 6 0 8 0 1 00 1 20 1 40 M in im u m M a x im u m Av e r a g e
N S D 01 220

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4


3 6 24 Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01 221

S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 20 40 6 0

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

BE R O

BE R O

M in im u m

8 0 1 00 1 20 1 40

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6


3 6 S o u n d c o n e w i dth in cm 24 1 2 0 M a x im u m Av e r a g e M in im u m
N S D 01 222

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 6


3 6 S o u nd co ne w id th in cm 2 4 1 2 0 -1 2 -2 4 -3 6 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 M a x imu m A ve r a g e M inimu m
N S D 01 2 2 3

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6


3 6 S o u nd co ne w idth in cm 2 4 1 2 0 -1 2 -2 4 -3 6 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 A ve r a g e
N S D 01 2 2 4

Ob j e ct
BE R O

Ob j e ct
BE R O

Ob j e ct
BE R O

M a x imu m M inimu m

-1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 1 0 20 3 0 40 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e ct d is ta nce in cm

Obj e ct dis ta nce in cm

2/12

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
M18S compact range, sensing range 3 ... 20 cm
M ea su rement 1 (mo st o p timu m reflec tio n), a ttenu a tio n 0
6
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 3

M ea su rement 2 (p la ne o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 0


3
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 4

4 2 O 2 M 0 M A a i n v x e i m i m r a u u g m m e
B E R O

i n

j e

j e

1 M 0

i n

M A a

i n v x e

i m r a i m

u g u

m e m

t h

i d

n
- 2 - 1

i d

t h

- 4

- 2

- 6 0

0 1

0 2

- 3 0

2
5 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5

j e

i s

t a

i n

j e

i s

t a

i n

M18S compact range, sensing range 5 ... 40 cm


M ea su rement 1 (mo st o p timu m reflec tio n), a ttenu a tio n 0
6
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 5

M ea su rement 2 (p la ne o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 0


5 4
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 6

2 M 0

i n

i n

j e

M A a

i n v x e

i m r a i m

u g u

m e m
B E R O

j e

3 2 1 0 - 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 M

i n A M v a e x

i m r a i m

u g u

m e m

t h

i d

- 2

- 4

- 6 0

i d

t h

0 5

j e

i s

t a

i n

j e

i s

t a

i n

M18S compact range, sensing range 10 ... 70 cm


M ea su rement 1 (mo st o p timu m reflec tio n), a ttenu a tio n 0
1 5
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 7

M ea su rement 2 (p la ne o b jec t), a ttenu a tio n 0


1 8 0
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 8

0 M 5 M 0 A a i n v x e i m i m r a u u g m
B

i n

i n

j e

m e
E R O

j e

6 4 2 0 - 2 - 4 - 6 - 8 - 1 0 0 M M A v a

t h

i n e x

i m r a i m

u g u

m e m

i d

- 5

- 1

- 1

5 0

i d

t h

0 6

0 1

j e

i s

t a

i n

j e

i s

t a

i n

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/ 13

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Compact range K21, sensing range 20 ... 250 mm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection)
4
Sound c one wi dt hi nc m
FS10_00271

Measurement 2 (plane object)


4
Sound c one wi dt hi nc m
FS10_00272

3 2 1 0 1 2 3

Av er age
Obj ec t

3 2 Av er age 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Obj ec tdi s t anc ei nc m

Obj ec t

BERO

BERO

4 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Obj ec tdi s t anc ei nc m

Compact range K21, sensing range 25 ... 400 mm


Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection)
4
Sound c one wi dt hi nc m
FS10_00273

Measurement 2 (plane object)


4
Sound c one wi dt hi nc m
FS10_00274

3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 0

3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Obj ec tdi s t anc ei nc m Av er age

Av er age
Obj ec t

Obj ec t

BERO

BERO

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Obj ec tdi s t anc ei nc m

2/14

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Compact range M30 K1 to M30 K3, sensing range 6 ... 30 cm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
12 9 S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m Ob j e c t
B E R O
N S D 0 012 7 8

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical object), attenuation 0


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 4 0 5 0 60 7 0 M in im u m
N S D0 012 7 9

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0


Av e r a g e S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m M a x im u m Ob j e c t 12 9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 4 0 5 0 60 7 0 M in im u m
N S D0 012 8 0

Av e r a g e M a x im u m

Av e r a g e M a x im u m

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12

M in im u m

BE R O

BE R O

10

2 0

30

4 0 5 0 60

7 0

Ob j e c t d i s t a n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t d i s t a n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 2


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 4 0 5 0 60 7 0 M in im u m
N S D0 012 8 1

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical object), attenuation 2


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D0 012 8 2

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 2


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30 4 0 5 0 60 7 0 M in im u m M a x im u m Av e r a g e
N S D0 012 8 3

A ve r a g e M a x im u m

A ve r a g e M a x im u m M in im u m
BE R O

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 30

BE R O

4 0 5 0 60

7 0

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0 M in im u m 30 4 0 5 0
N S D0 012 8 4

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical object), attenuation 4


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m
N S D 01 2 8 5

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m
N S D0 012 8 6

M a x im u m A ve r a g e O b je c t
BER O

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -1 2 0 10 20

M a x im u m A v e ra g e
BE R O

Ob j e c t

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 10 2 0

M a x im u m A ve r a g e

BE R O

M in im u m

M in im u m

30

40

50

30

4 0

5 0

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

O b je c t d is ta n c e in c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 5 10 15 2 0 2 5 30 35 4 0 M in im u m
N S D0 012 8 7

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical object), attenuation 6

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6


12 9 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m
N S D0 012 8 9

M a x im u m A ve r a g e
BE R O

Ob j e c t

6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 - 12 0 5 10 15

M a x im u m A ve r a g e

B E R O

Insufficient sensitiv ity

M in im u m

2 0 2 5

30 35

4 0

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

N ote: only th e sound cones w ith attenuation 0 apply to compact rang e M3 0 K 1.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/15

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Compact range M30 K1 to M30 K3, sensi ng range 20 . . . 130 cm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
42 24 1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 - 42 Ob j e c t
M in im u m
BE R O
N S D 01 225

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical ob ject), attenuation 0


42 24 1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 - 42
M in im u m
N S D 01 226

Measurement 3 (plane ob ject), attenuation 0


42 24 1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 - 42
N S D 01 227

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

Ob j e c t
B E R O

S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m

Ob j e c t
BE R O

40

8 0

1 20

1 6 0

200

40

8 0

1 20

1 6 0

S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m

S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

M a x im u m Av e r a g e M in im u m

200

40

8 0

1 20

1 6 0

200

Ob j e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 2


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01 228

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical ob ject), attenuation 2


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 1 2 0 M in im u m M a x im u m A ve r a g e
N S D 01 229

Measurement 3 (plane ob ject), attenuation 2


3 6 24 Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01 23 0

M a x im u m Av e r a g e

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0 1 20 1 6 0 200 M in im u m
BE R O

S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0

M a x im u m A ve r a g e M in im u m

-1 2

- 24 -3 6 0 40 8 0 1 20 1 6 0 200

1 20

1 6 0

200

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01 23 1

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical ob ject), attenuation 4


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dth i n c m Ob j e c t 1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 20 40 6 0 8 0 1 00 1 20 M in im u m A ve r a g e M a x im u m
N S D 01 23 2

Measurement 3 (plane ob ject), attenuation 4


3 6 24 Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01 23 3

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 20 40 6 0 8 0 1 00 1 20 M in im u m
BE R O

S o u n d c o n e w i d th i n c m

Av e r a g e M a x im u m

1 2 0 -1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 20

A ve r a g e M a x im u m

M in im u m

40

6 0

8 0

1 00 1 20

Ob j e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

Obj e c t d i s ta n c e i n c m

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6


3 6 24 S o u n d c o n e w i dt h i n c m Ob j e c t
BE R O
N S D 01 23 4

Measurement 2 (cy lind rical ob ject), attenuation 6

Measurement 3 (plane ob ject), attenuation 6


36 24 O b je c t
BER O
N S D 012 3 6

1 2 0

S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m

M a x im u m Av e r a g e M in im u m

12 0 -12 -2 4 -3 6

M a x im u m M in im u m

Insufficient sensitiv ity

-1 2 - 24 -3 6 0 1 0 20 3 0 40 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0

A v e ra g e

0 10 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 80

Ob j e c t di s ta n c e i n c m

O b je c t d is ta n c e in c m

N ote: only th e sound cones w ith attenuation 0 apply to compact rang e M3 0 K 1.

2/16

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Compact range M30 K1 to M30 K3, sensing range 40 ... 300 cm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01237

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0


90 Sound cone width in cm 60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60 120 180 240 300 Minimum
NSD 01238

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01239

Maximum Object Average Minimum


BERO

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60 120 180 240 300

Maximum Average

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60

Object
BERO

Object

Maximum Average Minimum

BERO

2
120 180 240 300

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 2


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01240

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 2


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01241

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 2


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01242

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0

Maximum

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60 120

Object
BERO

Object
Average Minimum
BERO

Maximum Average Minimum


BERO

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60

Object

Maximum Average Minimum

60

120

180

240

300

180

240

300

120

180

240

300

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01243

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 4


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01244

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01245

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0

Object
BERO

Maximum Average
Object
BERO

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0

Maximum Average
BERO

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60

Object

Maximum Average

Minimum

Minimum

Minimum

60

120

180

240

300

60

120

180

240

300

120

180

240

300

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01246

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 6


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01247

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6


90
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01248

60 30 0

Object
BERO

Maximum Average
BERO

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60 120

Object

Maximum Average
BERO

60 30 0 -30 -60 -9 0 0 60

Object

Maximum Average

-30 -60 -9 0 0 60

Minimum

Minimum

Minimum

120

180

240

300

180

240

300

120

180

240

300

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range M30 K1.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/ 17

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch
Compact range M30 K1 to M30 K3, sensing range 60 ... 600 cm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01249

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0


120 Sound cone width in cm 80 40 0 -40 -80 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
NSD 01250

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01251

80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Object Maximum Average Minimum
BERO

80 40 0 -40 -80 0 Minimum

Maximum Average

Object
BERO

Object Maximum Average Minimum


BERO

-120

-120

100 200 300 400 500 600

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 2


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01252

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 2


120 Sound cone width in cm 80 40 0 Minimum
NSD 01253

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 2


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01254

80 40 0 -40 -80 0

Maximum Average

Object
BERO

Maximum Average

80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0

Object
Minimum
BERO

Object
BERO

Maximum Average

Minimum

-40 -80 0 100 200 300 400 500 600

-120

-120
100 200 300 400 500 600

100 200 300 400 500 600

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01255

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 4


120 Sound cone width in cm 80 40 0 -40 -80 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Minimum Maximum Average
NSD 01256

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01257

80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0

Maximum Average Object Minimum


BERO

80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0

Object
BERO

Object

Maximum Average Minimum

BERO

100 200 300 400 500 600

-120

100 200 300 400 500 600

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01258

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 6


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01259

Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6


120
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01260

80 40 0 -40 -80 0

Object
BERO

Maximum Average Minimum


BERO

80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0

Object

Maximum Average
BERO

80 40 0 -40 -80 0

Object

Maximum Average Minimum

Minimum

-120

100 200 300 400 500 600

100 200 300 400 500 600

-120

100 200 300 400 500 600

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Object distance in cm

Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range M30 K1.

2/18

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch

I M ore information
Active surface T he active surface of an ultrasonic prox imity switch is the surface at which the ultrasound is emitted and received (IE C ). R eference axis T he reference ax is is the ax is running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IE C ). S ensing range T he sensing range is defined as the range within which the operating distance can be set (IE C ). W ith the sonar prox imity switches, this range ex tends from 3 cm to 10 m depending on the type. T he construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. R eflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. W ithin the blind z one, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons. O perating d istance T he operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference ax is (IE C ). R ated operating distance s n T he rated operating distance is a conventional variable for the definition of the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from ex ternal influences such as voltage or temperature are tak en into account (IE C ). E ffective operating distance s r T he real operating distance is the operating distance of a particular prox imity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IE C ). Accuracy T he accuracy is the permissible error that ex ists as the difference between the true distance and the indicated value. T he accuracy of a Sonar prox imity switch depends on internal tolerances as well as certain physical parameters of the air such as humidity, atmospheric pressure and air movement. T hese parameters influence the sound propagation time and therefore the measured value received. A tmospheric pressure A ny other atmospheric changes at a permanent site will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. B etween sea level and 3000 m altitude, the speed of sound is reduced by less than 1% . Sound propagation is not possible in a vacuum. A ir humidity A t room temperature and at lower temperatures, the humidity will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. A t higher temperatures, the speed of sound increases with humidity. A ir temperature T he sound propagation time is dependent on the air temperature. A n air temperature of 20 C is used as the reference variable here. T he speed of sound changes with air temperature by 0.17 % /K. T his temperature-dependent change in sound propagation time means that as the temperature increases, the distance to the object appears to become shorter. A change in temperature of, for ex ample, + 10 C results in a change in the speed of sound of approx imately + 1.7 5 % and therefore a change in the operating distance of + 1.7 5 % . G as types T he Sonar prox imity switch is designed for operation in atmospheric air. If it is operated in other gases, different values for the speed of sound and attenuation can result in significant measurement errors and even malfunction (e.g. in carbon diox ide). A ir currents C hanges to the speed of sound as a result of constant changes in the flow direction and flow velocity of the air cannot be q uantified by means of a generally applicable formula. H igh-temperature objects, such as glowing metal, cause air turbulence. T his will scatter or deflect the ultrasound. A n echo will not be generated that can be evaluated. P recipitation A verage levels of precipitation in the form of rain or snow will not adversely affect the functionality of the sonar prox imity switch. T he transducer surface should not, however, be wetted. D ewing is permissible. P aint spray T his has no determinable effect on the functioning of the sonar prox imity switch. T o prevent any detrimental effect on the sensitivity of the transducer, however, the paint spray must not be allowed to settle on the active transducer surface. E x ternal sound E x ternal sound is distinguished from the system-specific echoes and does not usually cause malfunctions. R epeat accuracy R T he repeat accuracy is the change in the effective operating distance sr at defined conditions (IE C ). T he repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 23 C ( 5 C ), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. T he repeat accuracy of the Sonar prox imity switch is 0.15 % of full-scale.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/19

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Sonar proximity switch

I Integ ration
Sensors and PLCs are growing together Thanks to intelligent linking to the PL C, IQ -Sense can now be used to implement significantly more flexibility and reliability of the sensors. The uniform exchange of data presents a great number of advantages for plant construction as well as for its operation. For example, the new IntelliTeach function permits machine and plant constructors to achieve fast commissioning, since all settings for the IQ -Sense devices can be made using the PL C. V alues set once on a sensor can be transmitted to other sensors without problem. Sensors can be exchanged during operation without any extra work since the PL C automatically reestablishes all sensor settings. Furthermore, IQ -Sense permits channelspecific system diagnostics. Wire break, short-circuit, maladjustment or module/sensor failure are automatically signaled, and parameterization errors are avoided. It is therefore possible to reduce downtimes and to increase plant availability. H ighl ights Configuration with STEP 7 Communication between sensor and SIMATIC PL C over a lowcost two-core cable Sensor parameterization through the control (IntelliTeach) System diagnostics down to a single sensor reduces downtimes Replacement of sensors during operation without re-parameterization The Sonar M18 proximity switch (range 6 to 30 cm and 15 to 100 cm) is connected via an 8 x IQ -Sense module to S7-300 and ET 200M.

W in C C v is u a liz a tio n

In d u s tria l Eth e rn e t

En g in e e rin g STEP 7

S7-300/ET 200M

PROCESS FIELD BUS

P R O F IB U S D P ET 200S

P ro x im ity s w itc h e s w ith IQ -Se n s e 1 ... 4 O p to


Integration of IQ -Sense in the automation environment

1 ... 8 O p to o r So n a r

2/20

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Overview

S IM A T IC P X S 1 0 0

2
C o m p a c t ra n g e K 0 F o rm
S en sin g ran g e (cm ) Op eratin g m o d e D iffu se senso r R eflex senso r T h ru -b ea m senso r Ou tp u t 1 sw itc h ing o u tp u t 2 sw itc h ing o u tp u ts A na lo g o u tp u t 0 ... 20 mA A na lo g o u tp u t 4 ... 20 mA A na lo g o u tp u t 0 ... 10 V Freq u enc y o u tp u t D irect co m m u n icatio n with th e P L C Tem p eratu re co m p en satio n A dj u stm en t 1 p o tentio meter 2 p o tentio meters T ea c h -In P lu g -in ju mp er SO N P R O G p ro g ra mming d ev ic e W irin g M 8 c o nnec to r M 12 c o nnec to r C a b le T ermina ls D eg ree o f p ro tectio n IP 6 5 IP 6 7 S ee p ag e 2/ 28

F ix e d se n so r h e a d
6. . . 30 20 . . . 100

S e p a ra te se n so r h e a d
6. . . 30 20 . . . 100

S o n a r th ru -b e a m s e n s o r
50 . . . 150

3SG 16 c o m p a c t fo rm
20 . . . 100


2/ 32 2/ 30

A c o nfig u ra to r in th e Internet fo r fa st p ro d u c t selec tio n a nd o rd ering c a n b e fo u nd u nd er

www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/ 21

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Overview

SIMATIC PXS200

2
Compact range M30 K1 Form
6 ... 30

Fixed sensor head


20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Sw iv el-mounted sensor head


6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Separate sensor head


6 ... 30 20 ... 130

Sensing range (cm) Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor Output 1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output Direct communication with the PLC Temperature compensation Adjustment 1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers Teach-In Plug-in jumper SONPROG programming device Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Degree of protection IP65 IP67 See page

2/34

A configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering can be found under

www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/22

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Overview

SIMATIC PXS200

2
Form
Sensing range (cm) Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor Output 1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output Direct communication with the PLC Temperature compensation Adjustment 1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers Teach-In Plug-in jumper SONPROG programming device Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Degree of protection IP65 IP67 See page

Compact range K08


5 ... 40 0 ... 80 0 ... 40

Compact range M18 S Straight sensor head


3 ... 20 5 ... 40 10 ... 70

Angled sensor head


3 ... 20 5 ... 40 10 ... 70

2/43

2/38

A configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering can be found under

www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/23

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Overview

SIMATIC PXS200

2
Form
Sensing range (cm) Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor Output 1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output Direct communication with the PLC Temperature compensation Adjustment 1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers Teach-In Plug-in jumper SONPROG programming device Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Degree of protection IP65 IP67 See page

Compact range M18S, 2 switching outputs Straight sensor head


2, 5 ... 40 5 ... 70

Compact range K21


2, 5 ... 25 2, 5 ... 40 0 ... 80

Angled sensor head


2, 5 ... 40 5 ... 70

2/38

2/41

A configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering can be found under

www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/24

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Overview

SIMATIC PXS300

2
Compact range M30 K2 Form Fixed sensor head
6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300

Swivel-mounted sensor head


40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Separate sensor head


6 ... 30 20 ... 130

Compact range M18


5 ... 30 15 ... 100

Compact form K65


6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250

Sensing range (cm) Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor Output 1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output Direct communication with the PLC Temperature compensation Adjustment 1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers Teach-In Plug-in jumper SONPROG programming device Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Degree of protection IP65 IP67 See page

60 ... 20 ... 6 ... 30 600 130

S7-300, ET 200M (v ia IQ -Se n s e )

2/45


2/49

2/51

A configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering can be found under

www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/25

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Overview

SIMATIC PXS4 00

2
Form Fixed sensor head
Sensing range (cm) Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor Output 1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output Direct communication with the PLC Temperature compensation Adjustment 1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers Teach-In Plug-in jumper SONPROG programming device Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Degree of protection IP65 IP67 See page 2/54 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Compact range M30 K3 Swivel-mounted sensor head


6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Separate sensor head


6 ... 30 20 ... 130

A configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering can be found under

www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/26

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Introduction Sonar
Overview

SIMATIC PXS800

SIMATIC PXS9 00

2
Form
Sensing range (cm) Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor Output 1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output Temperature compensation Adjustment 1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers Teach-In Plug-in jumper SONPROG programming device Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Degree of protection IP65 IP67 V ersion for hazardous area Z one 2/22 See page

Compact range M18 ATE X


5 ... 30 15 ... 100

Compact range M30 K3 ATE X


6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

D ouble-lay er sheet monitoring


2 ... 6


2/59


2/61

2/65

A configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering can be found under

www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/27

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS100
Compact range K0

I Overview

I Design
The devices of compact range K 0 are supplied in the standard version with permanently installed sensors. The devices of compact range K 0 can also be supplied with separate sensors. Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3 RG63 42, the sensor is installed in an M18 shell and in devices of type 3 RG63 43 it is installed in an M3 0 shell with a length of 25 mm in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of 1.6 m in length is molded onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the enclosure of compact range K 0 is established via the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The plug-in sock et is installed on the end face of the enclosure.

I F unction
Compact range K 0 is designed for simple applications. The devices are only suitable for operation as diffuse sensors. The sensors can be supplied with analog outputs. The end of operating range or analog range can be set using a potentiometer. U p to 6 devices can be synchroniz ed with each other.

Compact range K 0 with separate and fixed sensors

The Sonar proximity switches of compact range K 0 are ready-touse units with a rectangular enclosure. They are available with two sensing ranges. Operate as diffuse sensors Adjustable via potentiometer Can be synchroniz ed Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - switching output - analog output Connection via M12 connector, type F

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target H ysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 U ltrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display E nclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage cm cm mm mm V mA mA kH z H z ms ms 3R G 63 42 3R G 63 43 6 ... 3 0 20 ... 100 11 22 5 10 0,45 1,5 10 ... 3 5 (including 10% residual ripple, at 10 V to 18 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 3 0% ) 100 max. 3 5 400 200 8 5 70 90 7 7 Y ellow L E D CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65; IP68 with separate sensor 0 ... + 55 40 ... + 85

C C

2/28

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS100
Compact range K0

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm Rated operational current mA 100 100 100 100 100 100 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 3RG63 423AB 00 3RG63 433AB 00 3RG63 423AA00 3RG63 433AA00 3RG63 423JK00 3RG63 433JK00 Analog output Order No.

Fixed sensor
6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100

Separate sensor
6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 3RG63 423AB 01 3RG63 433AB 01 3RG63 423AA01 3RG63 433AA01 3RG63 423JK01 3RG63 433JK01

I Dimensions
3RG 63 4.3..00
65 53
P o t. + L E D

3RG 63 4.3..01
30
Ultra s o n ic c o n v e rte r
N S D 00772

65 53

L E D + P o ti 30

88 76

76 88

5 ,3 13,5

24

5 ,3

13,5

I Schematics
N S D 00759 N S D 00760

25

M 12

M 12 B

N S D 00773

Type 3RG63 423..01 3RG63 433..01

A M18 M30

B SW 24 SW 36

View from rear onto device


1 2 3 4 L+ O u tp u t LXI

L+ XI LO u tp u t

2 3 4

2 3
N S D 0 10 42a

1 4

N O o r fre q u e n c y o u tp u t

N C

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/29

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS100
3SG16 compact type

I Overview

I Function
R ange d efinitio n and ad j ustab ility The sonar proximity switch outputs a signal while an object is located in the set operating range or inhibit range outside the blind zone (see figure). The sensing range between 0.2 and 1 m is subdivided into 8 equal operating ranges of 0.1 m. Each operating range B1 to B8 can be selected using a connector in the terminal compartment.

The Sonar proximity switch signals with one output and one LED in each case whether objects are located in the set operating range or in the so-called inhibit range that precedes it. With the help of the supplied programming plug, two to eight of the separate operating ranges (B1 to B8) can be combined to form an extended operating range. The switching range is defined by two programming plugs. The plug is fitted to a pin connector in the terminal compartment of the device. The possible pin assignments are shown in the cover of the terminal compartment.
Sensing rang e (selectab le operating rang es via jum pers in term inal com partm ent)

Sound cone approx . 5

3SG16 compact type

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

The sonar proximity switch in compact form for DC is a complete, factory-assembled unit, ready for connection. It cannot be combined with devices from the compact range. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Foreground and background suppression Adjustable by means of plug-in jumpers Solid-state outputs: - 2 switching outputs Terminal compartment with screw terminals

Set operating rang e e. g . 0.8 to 0.9 m Output 1 (g reen LED)

0
Blind z one

0,2
Block ing rang e: Output 2 (red LED)

0,8

0,9

1m

M o d es Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor The sonar proximity switch switches when an object enters the sound cone from any direction, output 14 (NO) outputs a 1-signal if the object is located within a set operating range (B1 to B8). Output 24 (SX ) outputs a 1-signal if the object is in the inhibit range. Objects in the blind zone do not cause a utilizable signal change on outputs 14 and 24. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the ultrasonic beam will be interrupted by all objects in the inhibit range even those that absorb sound. In this case, output 14 (NO) changes to the 0-signal. In the case of reflective objects in the inhibit range, output 24 (SX ) changes to the 1-signal at the same time.

I Design
All components are located in a single box-shaped enclosure. The ultrasonic converter and the terminal compartment are arranged on the same enclosure level. The electrical connections are made via screw terminals in the terminal compartment; cable entry is through an M20 cable gland. Aligning unit To make it easier to align the Sonar proximity switch with the object to be detected, a 3SX 6 287 aligning unit is available. This unit allows swiveling about a horizontal and a vertical axis with an angle of rotation in each case of up to 30.

2/30

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD0_00754

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS100
3SG16 compact type

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Switching output Rated operational current Ie Voltage drop Residual current Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage cm cm mm mm V mA mA V mA kHz Hz ms ms 3SG16 compact type 20 ... 100 22 10 2 10 ... 35 (including 10% residual ripple, at 10 V to 18 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 30%) < 60 150 2 0,01 200 4 120 280 Yellow LED CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 25 ... 70 40 ... 85

C C

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm Sonar proximity switches 20 ... 100 3SG16 Rated operational current mA 150 Switching output pnp 2 NO Wiring Order No. Terminal compartment B 3SG16 671BJ87

Accessories
Aligning unit 3SX 6 287

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

I Dimensions
80 65 40 33
A N S D 007 7 7

5 ,3

65

135

7 ,3 x 5 ,3 LE D

1 9 ,5 S e n s o r c o n n e c to r ca n b e re tro fitte d

I Schematics
NSD00755

2 3 4

L+ Output 1 LOutput 2

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/31

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS100
Sonar thru-beam sensor

I Overview

I Function
Thru-beam sensor mode The emitter of the sonar thru-beam sensor emits a narrowly focused continuous tone in the direction of the receiver. The receiver located opposite evaluates this ultrasonic signal. Interruption of the tone by an object will cause the output signal to change. Adjustment of sensitivity

2
Sonar thru-beam sensor

The sensitivity can be adjusted at the receiver module at terminal 2 (NO version) or 4 (NC version).
XI Switching rate Hz 100 150 200 Emitter/receiver distance cm < 150 < 80 < 40

The sonar thru-beam sensor comprises an ultrasonic emitter and a receiver. The emitter and receiver circuits are installed in separate box-shaped enclosures of molded plastic. Operation as thru-beam sensor 3 measurement ranges can be set Solid-state output: - Switching output Connection - With 3 m cable - With M8 plug, 4-pole, type B - With M12, 4-pin, Type F connector

Not connected
L L+

O bject detection The minimum size of detectable objects depends on the distance between emitter and receiver. If the distance is less than 40 cm, objects 2 cm or larger will be detected. The gap with between two objects must be at least 3 mm. If the distance is shorter, gaps of even <1 mm can be detected. At maximum distance, objects greater than 4 cm in size can be detected. In this case the gaps between the objects must be > 1 cm.
T ransmitter Objeto R eceptor

NSD00750

5 - 150 cm

Layout

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Up to 40 cm Up to 80 cm Up to 150 cm Response time Up to 40 cm Up to 80 cm Up to 150 cm Power-up delay tv Status indication Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C cm cm V mA mA kHz Hz Hz Hz ms ms ms ms 3RG62 43.P (receiver) 2 2 20 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple) 100 < 20 200 150 100 2 1,5 1 < 40 Green LED CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 0 ... +70 25 ... +85 200 3RG62 43.N (emitter) 5 ... 150

2/32

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS100
Sonar thru-beam sensor

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 Rated operational current mA 100 100 100 100 100 100 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NC Emitter 1 NO 1 NC Emitter 1 NO 1 NC Emitter Wiring Order No. Cable, 3 m Cable, 3 m Cable, 3 m M8 connector M8 connector M8 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector 3RG62 430PB00 3RG62 430PA00 3RG62 430NN00 B 3RG62 437PB00 3RG62 437PA00 3RG62 437NN00 3RG62 433PB00 3RG62 433PA00 3RG62 433NN00

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

I Dimensions
3RG62 430..00
F or M 4 40 31 4,5

3RG62 433..00, 3RG62 437..00


F or M 4 28 40 31 4,5

28

31 40

29

NSD00771

I Schematics
NSD00751

4,5

4,5

19

28

NSD00774

29

19

28

31 40

NSD00753a

4/2

W H /BK
LL+

2/4

X1 LL+

View from rear onto device


2 3
NSD01042a

3 2/4 1

3 BU BK /W H 4/2 1 BN

1 4

Emitter

Receiver (NO/NC)

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/33

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
Compact range M30 K1

I Overview

I Design
Standard version In the standard version, the devices have a permanently installed sensor. V ersion w ith sep arate sensor

M30 type with fixed sensor

The Sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K1 are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capability. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Adjustable via 2 potentiometers Electronic switching output Connection via M12 connector, 3-pin or 4-pin, Type E, F

M30 form with separate sensor

Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. For devices of Type 3RG6. 12, the sensor is in an M18 sleeve, for devices of type 3RG6. 13, the sensor is installed in an M30 sleeve with a length of 25 mm in each case. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead, which is 1.6 m long, is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established via the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The plug-in socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. V ersion w ith sw ivel sensor These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of compact range M30 K1. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard type cannot be used due to space limitations.

M30 form with swivel sensor

The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 100 to the cylinder axis. P assive reflector With the Sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K1, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the Sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is therefore reduced by about 6 cm.

2/34

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
Compact range M30 K1

I Function
Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.
Sonar-BERO
Sound cone Object

Modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the Sonar proximity switch and the reflector, even those that absorb sound.

Blind zone

Sensing range

Sound cone

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO contact NC contact No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage 3RG60 .2 3RG60 .3 3RG60 .4 3RG60 .5 cm 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 60 ... 600 40 ... 300 cm 1 1 22 10 10 55 mm 10 10 60 20 mm 0,45 2 9 5 V 12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 V to 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20 %) mA mA mA kHz Hz ms ms 300 300 Max. 50 400 200 80 8 4 1 80 110 400 280 280 280 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP65; IP68 with separate sensor IP65 25 ... +70 40 ... +85

NSD0_00756

Initial value (adjustable)

Set operating or analog range (LED lit)

Final value (adjustable)

120 2 200 280

C C

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/35

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
Compact range M30 K1

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm R ated o p eratio nal c u rrent m A 300 300 300 300 Sw itc h ing o u tp u t p np 1 N O 1 N O 1 N O 1 N O 3R G 60 123A D 00 3R G 60 133A D 00 3R G 60 153A D 00 3R G 60 143A D 00 A nalo g o u tp u t O rd er N o .

F ixed sensor
3 R G 6 0 1 2 3 ..0 0 6 ... 30 2 0 ... 1 3 0 4 0 ... 3 0 0 6 0 ... 6 0 0

3 R G 6 0 1 3 3 ..0 0

6 ...

30

300 300 300 300

1 N C 1 N C 1 N C 1 N C

3R G 60 123A C 00 3R G 60 133A C 00 3R G 60 153A C 00 3R G 60 143A C 00

2 0 ... 1 3 0 4 0 ... 3 0 0 6 0 ... 6 0 0

3 R G 6 0 1 5 3 ..0 0

3 R G 6 0 1 4 3 ..0 0

Sw ivel sensor
3 R G 6 0 2 5 3 ..0 0 6 ... 30 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 1 N O 1 N O 1 N O 1 N O 1 N C 1 N C 1 N C 1 N C 1 N O 1 N O 1 N C 1 N C 3R G 60 223A D 00 3R G 60 233A D 00 3R G 60 253A D 00 3R G 60 243A D 00 3R G 60 223A C 00 3R G 60 233A C 00 3R G 60 253A C 00 3R G 60 243A C 00 3R G 60 123A D 01 3R G 60 133A D 01 3R G 60 123A C 01 3R G 60 133A C 01 2 0 ... 1 3 0 4 0 ... 3 0 0 6 0 ... 6 0 0 6 ... 30 2 0 ... 1 3 0 4 0 ... 3 0 0 6 0 ... 6 0 0

Sep arate sensor


3 R G 6 0 1 2 3 ..0 1 6 ... 6 ... 30 30 2 0 ... 1 3 0 2 0 ... 1 3 0

2/36

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
Compact range M30 K1

I Dimensions
With fixed sensor
3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00
M 30x 1,5
33 19

3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34

3RG 6. 143..00
65 34

M 30x 1,5 SW 36

99

M 30x 1,5 SW 36

80

35 21

SW 36

131

15 0

101 15 3

27,3
NSD00778

27,3

27,3
10,5
NSD00780

2
10,5

M 12x 1

10,5

M 12x 1

NSD00779

M 12x 1

With sw ivel ing sensor


3RG 6. 223..00 3RG 6. 233..00
18 12 28 105 30
12

3RG 6. 253..00
18 34 100
47,5

3RG 6. 243..00
18 37 95 12 65
25

35

45
80

SW 36

80

80

SW 36 M 30x 1,5
NSD00783

131

M 30x 1,5

SW 36 M 30x 1,5
NSD00785

131

NSD00784

27,3

131

27,3

27,3
10,5

10,5

M 12x 1

10,5

M 12x 1

M 12x 1

With sep arate sensor


3RG 6. 123..01
C a b le le n g th 1,6 m SW 24 25 M 18x 1

3RG 6. 133..01
C a b le le n g th 1,6 m SW 36 25 M 30x 1,5 10,5 131 148

SW 36 80

M 30x 1,5

131 148

M 30x 1,5

27,3
NSD00786
NSD00787

M 12x 1

10,5

M 12x 1

I Sch ematics
Compact range M 30 K 1
NSD0075 7
NSD0075 8

SW 36 80

27,3

L+

V iew from rear onto dev ice


1 2 3 L+ O u tp u t L-

U
3 4 L-

U
O u tp u t
NC

2 3
NSD01042a

1 4

NO

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/ 37

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
M18S compact series

I Overview

M18 S design

T he Sonar prox imity switches of the M18 S compact series are ready -to-connect complete units in a cy lindrical enclosure. Can b e operated as diffuse sensors or reflex sensors Adjustab le via teach-in (switching output only ) E lectronic outputs: - Switching output - Freq uency output, suitab le for connection to L OGO! Connected via M12 plug - 4-pin, ty pe F (1 output) - 5-pin, ty pe G (2 outputs)

I Design
Compact range M18 S can b e supplied with an aligned sensor head or an angled sensor head. T he small phy sical siz e of the sensors mak es them ideal for applications where space is limited.

I Fu nction
Availab le as diffuse sensors and reflex sensors. T he sensors can b e supplied with switching or freq uency outputs. D ue to their wide range and a minimiz ed close range, they are suitab le for a wide variety of applications. Programming T he sensors with a switching output can b e set via the device terminals b y means of a teach-in function. For the sensors with a freq uency output, the range can b e set via the wiring. E valuation can b e performed in a P L C or in a L OGO! mini P L C.

2/38

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
M18S compact series

I Technical specifications
Type M18 S N umb er of outputs Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target H ysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operating voltage (DC) Rated operating current Ie No-load supply current I0 U ltrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Operation Storage 25 ... + 7 0 C 40 ... + 85 C 3RG64 22, 3RG64 32 1 30 ... 200 mm or 0 200 mm 50 ... 200 mm or 120 220 mm 2 cm 2 cm 10 mm or 2 mm 1 (frequency output 2.5) 20 ... 30 V (including 10% residual ripple) 150 mA Max. 20 mA 400 kH z 10 H z 50 ms 20 ms Y ellow LED B rass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 300 kH z 8H z 100 ms 20 ms 200 kH z 5H z 100 ms 20 ms 3RG64 21, 3RG64 31 1 50 ... 400 mm or 0 400 mm 60 ... 400 mm or 155 435 mm 2 cm 2 cm 10 mm or 2 mm 3RG64 23, 3RG64 33 1 100 ... 7 00 mm or 0 7 00 mm 150 ... 7 00 mm or 350 7 50 mm 2 cm 2 cm 10 mm or 3 mm

Type M 18 S N umb er of outputs Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target H ysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operating voltage (DC) Rated operating current Ie No-load supply current I0 U ltrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay Switching status display U ltrasonic frequency Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Operation Storage

3RG64 21, 3RG64 31 2 25 ... 400 mm 40 ... 400 mm 2 cm 2 cm 10 mm 1 (frequency output 2.5) 20 ... 30 V (including 10% residual ripple) 37 5 mA Max. 20 mA 300 kH z 10 H z 50 ms 20 ms 2 yellow LEDs 300 kH z IP67 25 ... + 7 0 C 40 ... + 85 C

3RG64 23, 3RG64 33 2 50 ... 7 00 mm 7 5 ... 7 00 mm 2 cm 2 cm 10 mm

200 kH z 5H z 100 ms 20 ms 200 kH z

B rass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/39

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
M18S compact series

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm Rated operational current mA 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 375 375 375 375 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 375 375 375 375 Switching output Operating mode/ frequency output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 2 NO 1 NC, 1 NO 1 NC, 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 2 NO 1 NC, 1 NO 1 NC, 1 NO Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor 400 ... 1600 Hz 200 ... 800 Hz 240 ... 1600 Hz 60 ... 400 Hz 300 ... 1400 Hz 150 ... 700 Hz Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor 400 ... 1600 Hz 200 ... 800 Hz 240 ... 1600 Hz 60 ... 400 Hz 300 ... 1400 Hz 150 ... 700 Hz Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor A Order No.

Straight sensor
3 ... 20 5 ... 40 10 ... 70 0 ... 20 0 ... 40 0 ... 70 3 ... 20 5 ... 40 10 ... 70 2,5 ... 40 5 ... 70 2,5 .. 40 5 ... 70 3RG64 323AB 00 3RG64 313AB 00 3RG64 333AB 00 3RG64 323B B 00 3RG64 313B B 00 3RG64 333B B 00 3RG64 323RS00 3RG64 313RS00 3RG64 333RS00 A A A A 3RG64 31-3AH 00 3RG64 33-3AH 00 3RG64 31-3AJ00 3RG64 33-3AJ00 3RG64 223AB 00 3RG64 213AB 00 3RG64 233AB 00 3RG64 223B B 00 3RG64 213B B 00 3RG64 233B B 00 3RG64 223RS00 3RG64 213RS00 3RG64 233RS00 A A 3RG64 21-3AH 00 3RG64 23-3AH 00 3RG64 21-3AJ00 3RG64 23-3AJ00 3RX 4 010 A 3RX 4 020

Angled sensor
3 ... 20 5 ... 40 10 ... 70 0 ... 20 0 ... 40 0 ... 70 3 ... 20 5 ... 40 10 ... 70 2,5 ... 40 5 ... 70 2,5 .. 40 5 ... 70

Accessories
Teach-In adapter, 4 pole Teach-In adapter, 5 pole

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR9 9 H

I Dimensions
3RG64 2. (angled sensor)
Sens ing s urfac e
18,5

3RG64 3. (straight sensor)


0,5
M 18x1
NSD01290

M 18x1 12
NSD01291

51,5 37

SW 24

12

LED M 12x1

12

LED M 12x1

I Schematics
NSD0_ 00820

Rear view of device:


1 L+ ET L Aus gang
FS10_00275

SW 24

51 A 37

Rear view of device:


1 2 3 4
NC

2 3 4

2 3
NSD01042a

1 4

L+ ET L-

2 3
NSD00763a

1 5 4

Swi t c hi ng out put Swi t c hi ng out put

F req uenz aus gang

1 switching output/frequency output

2 switching outputs

2/40

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
K21 compact series

I Overview
Sonar proximity switches from the K21 compact range SIMATIC PX S240 are complete, prewired units in a miniature cubic enclosure. Operation as a diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via "teach-in" (with switching output only) Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! W iring via M8 connector - 4-pole, type B

Compact range K21

I Benefits
Simple, precise object recognition Also senses transparent objects and liquids Ultrasonic: Not influenced by the objects color or brightness Suitable for use in cramped conditions and tough environments High degree of protection IP67 Configured using "teach-in"

I Technical specifications
Type
Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target Differential travel H Repeat accuracy R Operating voltage, including 10% residual ripple Rated operating current Ie Switching output, max. Frequency output, max. No-load current I0, max. Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status indicator Enclosure material Transformer surface finish Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage -25 ... +70 C -40 ... +85 C -25 ... +70 C -40 ... +85 C -25 ... +70 C -40 ... +85 C 200 mA 100 mA 20 mA 400 kHz 10 Hz 50 ms 150 ms Yellow LED ABS / PMMA Epoxy resin IP67 200 mA 100 mA 20 mA 300 kHz 10 Hz 75 ms 150 ms Yellow LED ABS / PMMA Epoxy resin IP67 200 mA 100 mA 20 mA 300 kHz 100 Hz 5 ms 150 ms Yellow LED ABS / PMMA Epoxy resin IP67 6GR62 42 20 mm ... 250 mm or 0 mm ... 250 mm 45 mm ... 250 mm or 85 mm ... 250 mm 2 cm x 2 cm 2.5 mm 1 mm (frequency output 2.5 mm) 20 ... 30 V DC 6GR62 41 25 mm ... 400 mm or 0 mm ... 400 mm 40 mm ... 400 mm or 85 mm ... 400 mm 2 cm x 2 cm 4 mm 1 mm (frequency output 2.5 mm) 20 ... 30 V DC 6GR62 41-. P. . 0 mm ... 800 mm 2 cm x 2 cm 20 30 V DC

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/41

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
K21 compact series

I Selection and Ordering data


PXS240 Sensing range mm Operating mode/ frequency output Switching output Wiring Order No.

Compact series K21


20 250 Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector 2 m cable M8 connector A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 6GR62 41-0AB00 6GR62 41-7AB00 6GR62 41-0AA00 6GR62 41-7AA00 6GR62 41-0RS00 6GR62 41-7RS00 6GR62 42-0AB00 6GR62 42-7AB00 6GR62 42-0AA00 6GR62 42-7AA00 6GR62 42-0RS00 6GR62 42-7RS00 6GR62 41-0BB00 6GR62 41-7BB00 6GR62 41-0BA00 6GR62 41-7BA00 6GR62 42-0BB00 6GR62 42-7BB00 6GR62 42-0BA00 6GR62 42-7BA00 6GR62 41-0NN00 6GR62 41-7NN00 6GR62 41-0PB00 6GR62 41-7PB00 6GR62 41-0PA00 6GR62 41-7PA00

2
20 250

... 400 Hz /... 800 Hz ... 400 Hz /... 800 Hz Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor ... 250 Hz /... 500 Hz ... 250 Hz /... 500 Hz 0 400 Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor 0 250 Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor 0 800

Thru-beam sensor emitter Thru-beam sensor emitter Thru-beam sensor receiver Thru-beam sensor receiver Thru-beam sensor receiver Thru-beam sensor receiver NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact

Accessories
Teach-In Adapter Mounting bracket 3RX4 030 3RX7 308-0AA00

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
12
NSD0_01091

20 3

12
NSD0_01092

20 3 39,6 31 24

33 31 24

3,3

3,3

12

2,6

M 8x1

2,6

I Schematics
NSD0_00820

View from rear onto device


1 L+ ET L Output
B
2 3

N W B K B U H

( 1 ( 2 ( 4 ( 3

) ) E )

+ 7 T S ) 0 w V

2 3 4

2 3
NSD01042a

1 4

/ F

r e

t p

F t t 1 switching output/frequency output

M8 connector, type B, cable

2/42

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
K08 compact form

I Overview
The Sonar proximity switches of K08 compact form are ready-touse all-in-one units with a rectangular metal enclosure. 3 versions with different operating modes: - Diffuse sensors with background suppression - Reflex sensor - Thru-beam sensor: Diffuse sensor and reflex sensor: - Up to 6 devices can be synchronized - Adjustment per teach-in Solid-state outputs: - 1 pnp and 1 npn switching output - NO/NC adjustable Connection via M12 connector, 5-pin, rotatable by 90, Type G

K08 compact series

I Technical specifications
Type Operating mode Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Indicators Switching status Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage mm mm cm mm mm V mA mA kHz Hz ms ms 3RG64 513CC00 3RG64 513DC00 3RG64 513SB00 Thru-beam sensor 0 ... 800 0 ... 800 2 2 Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor 50 ... 400 0 ... 400 60 ... 400 160 ... 400 2 2 2 2 10 2 1 1 20 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple) 150 Max. 25 300 300 8 8 100 100 250 250 Yellow LED Green LED Metal IP67 C C 25 ... +70 40 ... +85

300 250 100 250

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range mm Rated operational current mA 150 150 150 Switching output pnp + npn 1 selectable NO/NC contact each 1 selectable NO/NC contact each 1 NO each Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor emitter Thru-beam sensor receiver 3RG64 51-3CC00 3RG64 51-3DC00 3RG64 51-3NN00 3RG64 51-3SB00 Operating mode Order No.

Cubic form
50 ... 400 0 ... 400 0 ... 800

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/43

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS200
K08 compact form

I Dimensions
8 10
M12x1 15

M4 7G (2x) t= 3,5 38
4,5

LED Y E LED G N

4,6 (2x)

M4

Co nv erter
32,5

NSD0-00822

I Schematics
NSD0_00821

66

13

M4 7G (2x) t= 6

24

48

1 2 3 4 5

L+ Sw itching o utput 2 L-

View from rear onto device


2 3
NSD00763a

24

4,5

1 5 4

Sw itching o utput 1
X I

NO

2/44

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
Compact range M30 K2

I Overview

I Design
Standard version In the standard version, the devices have a permanently installed sensor. V ersion with separate sensor

M30 type with fixed sensor

The Sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K2 are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capability. Operate as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via 2 potentiometers, with SONPROG Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - 1 or 2 switching outputs - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection with M12 connector - 4-pole (with 1 output), Type F - 5-pole (with 2 outputs), Type G

M30 type with separate sensor

Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. For devices of Type 3RG6. 12, the sensor is in an M18 sleeve, for devices of type 3RG6. 13, the sensor is installed in an M30 sleeve with a length of 25 mm in each case. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead, which is 1.6 m long, is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established via the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The plug-in socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. V ersion with swivel sensor These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of compact range M30 K2. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations.

M30 form with swivel sensor

The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 100 to the cylinder axis. Passive reflector With the Sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K2, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the Sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/45

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
Compact range M30 K2

I Function
Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output. M odes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the Sonar proximity switch and the reflector even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensors. The Sonar-BERO only evaluates whether or not an object is located between the emitter and the receiver. The range of the arrangement is twice that of a single sensor.
NSD0_00756

Sonar-BERO

Sound cone

Object

Initial value (ad justable) Blind zone

Set operating or analog range (LED lit) Sensing range

Final value (ad justable)

Programming
SONPROG

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M30 K2 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.

Sound cone

The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching rate Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Sensitivity Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO contact NC contact No-load current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage cm cm mm mm V mA mA mA kHz Hz ms ms 3RG60 .2 3RG60 .3 3RG60 .4 3RG60 .5 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 60 ... 600 40 ... 300 11 22 10 10 55 10 10 60 20 0.45 2 9 5 12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 V to 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20 %) 300 300 Max. 50 400 200 80 8 4 1 80 110 400 280 280 280 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP65; IP68 with separate sensor IP65 25 ... +70 40 ... +85

120 2 200 280

C C

2/46

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
Compact range M30 K2

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm Rated operational current mA 300 300 300 300 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 3RG60 123AF00 3RG60 133AF00 3RG60 153AF00 3RG60 143AF00 Frequency output Order No.

Fixed sensor
3RG60 123..00 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG60 133..00

6 ...

30

300 300 300 300

1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC

3RG60 123AE 00 3RG60 133AE 00 3RG60 153AE 00 3RG60 143AE 00

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG60 153..00

6 ...

30

300 300 300 300

2 NO 2 NO 2 NO 2 NO

3RG60 123AH00 3RG60 133AH00 3RG60 153AH00 3RG60 143AH00

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG60 143..00

6 ...

30

300 300 300 300

2 NC 2 NC 2 NC 2 NC

3RG60 123AG00 3RG60 133AG00 3RG60 153AG00 3RG60 143AG00

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

6 ...

30

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300

1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC

30 ... 150 Hz 20 ... 130 Hz 20 ... 150 Hz 15 ... 150 Hz

3RG60 123RS00 3RG60 133RS00 3RG60 153RS00 3RG60 143RS00 3RG60 223AF00 3RG60 233AF00 3RG60 253AF00 3RG60 243AF00 3RG60 223AE 00 3RG60 233AE 00 3RG60 253AE 00 3RG60 243AE 00 3RG60 123AF01 3RG60 133AF01 3RG60 123AE 01 3RG60 133AE 01

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Swivel sensor
3RG60 253..00 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Separate sensor
3RG60 123..01 6 ... 6 ... 30 30 20 ... 130 20 ... 130

Accessories
SONPROG interface unit, 100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC 3RX4 000

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/47

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
Compact range M30 K2

I Dimensions
With fixed sensor
3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00
M 30x1,5
33 19

3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34

3RG 6. 143..00
65 34

M 30x1,5 SW 36

99

M 30x1,5 SW 36

80

35 21

SW 36

131

27,3
NSD00778
NSD00779

27,3

150

27,3
10,5
NSD00780

10,5

M 12x1

M 12x1

M 12x1

With swivel sensor


3RG 6. 223..00 3RG 6. 233..00
18 12 28 105 30
12

3RG 6. 253..00
18 34 100
47,5

3RG 6. 243..00
18 37 95 12 65
25

35

45
80

SW 36

80

80

SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00783

131

M 30x1,5

SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00785

131

NSD00784

27,3 10,5

131

27,3 10,5

27,3
10,5

M 12x1

M 12x1

M 12x1

With separate sensor


3RG 6. 123..01
Cable length 1,6 m SW 24 25 M 18x1

3RG 6. 133..01
Cable length 1,6 m SW 36 25 M 30x1,5

SW 36 80

131 148

SW 36 80

M 30x1,5

M 30x1,5
27,3

NSD00786

27,3
NSD00787

10,5

M 12x1

M 12x1

I Schematics
Compact range M30 K2
NSD00759 NSD00760

10,5

131 148

10,5

101 153

L+ XI LOutput

2 3 4

2 3 4

L+ Output LXI

2 3
NSD01042a

1 4

NO or frequency output
Compact range M30 K2 with 2 switching outputs
NSD0_00761

NC

1 2 3 4 5

L+ XI L-

NSD00762

1 2 3 4 5

L+
Switching output 1

2 3
NSD00763a

1 5 4

LXI
Switching output 2

Switching output 1 Switching output 2

NO

NC

2/48

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
Compact range M18

I Overview

I Function
The devices are suitable for operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor and thru-beam sensor. The sensors can be supplied with switching, analog or frequency outputs. Up to 10 sensors of the M18 compact range can be synchronized with each other via the enable inputs. The devices are also suitable for multiplex mode. For a detailed description, see compact ranges M30 K2. Programming
SONPROG

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M18 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.

M18 type

The Sonar proximity switches of compact range M18 are readyto-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure. Operates as diffuse sensor, thru-beam sensor and can be parameterized as a reflex sensor with SONPROG Adjustable via a potentiometer, with SONPROG programming device Background suppression and can be set as foreground suppression with SONPROG Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Analog output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection via M12, 4-pin, Type F connector

The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.

I Design
The devices of compact range M18 are all supplied with permanently installed sensors in the longitudinal axis.

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage cm cm mm mm V mA mA kHz Hz ms ms 3RG62 32 3RG62 33 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 11 22 10 1 2 12 ... 30 (including +/- 10 % residual ripple; at 12 V to 20 V DC sensitivity reduced by up to 20%) 150 Max. 60 400 200 5 4 100 120 280 280 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 25 ... +70 40 ... +85

C C

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/49

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
Compact range M18

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 From IQ -Sense From IQ -Sense Rated operational current mA 150 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC IQ -Sense IQ -Sense Analog/ frequency output 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 250 ... 1500 Hz 150 ... 1000 Hz Order No. B 3RG62 323AB00 3RG62 333AB00 B 3RG62 323AA00 3RG62 333AA00 B 3RG62 323L S00 B 3RG62 333L S00 B 3RG62 323TS00 B 3RG62 333TS00 B 3RG62 323JS00 B 3RG62 333JS00 B 3RG62 323RS00 3RG62 333RS00 3SF62 323JA00 3SF62 333JA00 3RX4 000

Communication-capable proximity switches of the M18 I Q -Sense range

Accessories
SONPROG interface unit, 100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

I Dimensions
3RG 62 3.3A.00
M 18x1 4

3RG 62 3.3.S00
M 18x1 4 104 (-3) 65
NSD00775

104 (-3) 65

SW 24 72,5 90,5

P oti
NSD0 00776

LED (4x)

LED (4x)

I Schematics
NSD00759 NSD00760

SW 24 90,5

View from rear onto device


1 2 3 4 L+ Output LXI
2 3
NSD01042a

L+ XI LOutput

2 3 4

1 4

NO or frequency output

NC

2/50

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
K65 compact form

I Overview

I Function
Sensors with switching or analog output Within the sensing range, the fill level of a container is detected. If the fill level reaches one of the two switching thresholds (Smin, Smax), the corresponding output is set. On emptying or filling, the switching outputs remain set in accordance with the differential travel (Hmin, Hmax). This is signaled by the corresponding LED. If the level is located between the two operating ranges, both outputs are reset (see "Definition of the ranges").
Sonar-BERO

S max S min

Blind zone S max Sensing range S min


NSD0_01120

H max
S max S min

K65 compact form

The Sonar proximity switches of the K65 compact form are ready-to-use complete self-contained units. They operate with a DC supply. Their enclosure design and function makes them ideal for level applications in small containers. The devices feature two switching outputs (Smin and Smax) to which different distances can be assigned. This allows, for example, the minimum and maximum fill level in a tank to be evaluated. The values are set using the SONPROG interface device or by means of automatic alignment (teach-in function).

H min
S max S min

Definition of the ranges

I Design
All components are located in a box-shaped enclosure with rounded edges. The ultrasonic converter is mounted in the enclosure slightly recessed in the enclosure. The integrated circular sealing ring allows the Sonar proximity switch to be used as a plug with integrated level measuring. The tank opening must have a minimum diameter of 26 mm. It can be fixed to the tank by means of two M5 screws. The electric connection is made using a 5-pin connector with M12 thread.

B lind zone Objects at close range cause fault signals, so the user must install the sensor such that the fill level cannot enter close range. Programming
SONPROG

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of compact form K65 can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4000 interface device.

The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/51

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
K65 compact form

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target Switching threshold Smax Smin Hysteresis H H max (adjustable) cm cm cm cm cm cm V mA mA V 3RG62 52 6 ... 50 11 8 45 2 3RG62 53 20 ... 150 22 25 140 5 3RG62 55 25 ... 250 55 35 230 10

H min (adjustable) Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Switching output Rated operational current Ie Voltage drop Switching element function Smax Switching element function Smin Ultrasonic frequency Response time Power-up delay LEDs Switching status Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage

10 10 20 12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 V to 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20%) Max. 60 150 or 300 (see Selection and Ordering data) 2 NO contact NO/NC programmable

kHz ms ms

400 20 250 2 yellow LEDs

200 25

120 50

Green LED CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 C C 25 ... 70 40 ... 85

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 30 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 Rated operational current mA 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 Switching output pnp 2 NO 2 NO 2 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO Analog / frequency output 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 30 ... 150 Hz 20 ... 150 Hz 12,5 ... 125 Hz Wiring Order No. M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector B 3RG62 523AH00 B 3RG62 533AH00 B 3RG62 553AH00 B 3RG62 523BF00 B 3RG62 533BF00 B 3RG62 553BF00 B 3RG62 523CF00 B 3RG62 533CF00 3RG62 553CF00 B 3RG62 523GF00 B 3RG62 533GF00 B 3RG62 553GF00 3RG62 523RS00 3RG62 533RS00 3RG62 553RS00 3RX4 000

Accessories
SONPROG interface unit, 100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC

Teach-In Adapter

3RX4 010

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

2/52

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS300
K65 compact form

I Dimensions
8,8 10 17 30 30
NSD01138

5,5

54

125

I Schematics
Sensors with switching output
Wiring
1 2 1 3 4 4 5 L+ XI LS min S max
NSD01119a

12

Automatic alignment
1 2 5 3
NSD001134

46 64,4

2 5 3

2 3 4 5

View from rear onto device

View from rear onto device XI must be connected to Lfor the automatic alignment.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/53

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS400
Compact range M30 K3

I O verview

I D esign
Standard version In th e sta nd a rd v ersio n, th e d ev ic es h a v e a p erma nently insta lled senso r. V ersion w ith sep arate sensor

M 3 0 ty p e w ith fix ed senso r

T h e So na r p ro x imity sw itc h es o f c o mp a c t ra ng e M 3 0 K 3 a re rea d y -to -u se a ll-in-o ne u nits w ith a c y lind ric a l M 3 0 enc lo su re. T h ey d iffer w ith reg a rd to th eir ra ng e, th eir fu nc tio na l sc o p e a nd th eir a d ju stment o r p ro g ra mming c a p a b ility . O p era te a s d iffu se senso r, reflex senso r o r th ru -b ea m senso r A d ju sta b le v ia 2 p o tentio meters, w ith SO N P R O G p ro g ra mming d ev ic e Fo reg ro u nd a nd b a c k g ro u nd su p p ressio n Sy nc h ro niz a tio n c a p a b ility , mu ltip lex o p era tio n T emp era tu re c o mp ensa tio n So lid -sta te o u tp u ts: - Sw itc h ing o u tp u ts - A na lo g o u tp u t C o nnec tio n v ia M 12, 5 -p in, T y p e G c o nnec to r

M 3 0 ty p e w ith sep a ra te senso r

D u e to its sma ll d imensio ns, th e senso r is esp ec ia lly su ita b le in c o nfined sp a c es. T h e u ltra so nic senso r is insta lled in a c y lind ric a l enc lo su re sep a ra ted fro m th e o th er elec tro nic s. Fo r d ev ic es o f T y p e 3 R G 6 . 12, th e senso r is in a n M 18 sleev e, fo r d ev ic es o f ty p e 3 R G 6 . 13 , th e senso r is insta lled in a n M 3 0 sleev e w ith a leng th o f 25 mm in ea c h c a se. T w o nu ts a re su p p lied fo r fix ing . T h e c o nnec ting lea d , w h ic h is 1.6 m lo ng , is c a st o nto th e senso r. T h e c o nnec tio n to th e ev a lu a tio n elec tro nic s lo c a ted in th e M 3 0 enc lo su re o f th e c o mp a c t ra ng e is esta b lish ed v ia th e p rea ssemb led c o a x ia l c a b le p lu g . T h e p lu g -in so c k et is insta lled o n th e end fa c e o f th e enc lo su re. V ersion w ith sw ivel sensor T h ese d ev ic es c o rresp o nd fu nc tio na lly to th e o th er d ev ic es o f c o mp a c t ra ng e M 3 0 K 3 . T h ey a re p a rtic u la rly su ita b le fo r a p p lic a tio ns w h ere th e sta nd a rd ty p es c a nno t b e u sed d u e to sp a c e limita tio ns.

M 3 0 fo rm w ith sw iv el senso r

T h e u ltra so nic senso r is h ing ed w ith a sw iv el a rm to th e tu b u la r enc lo su re o f th e sig na l ev a lu a to r. T h is a llo w s ro ta tio n a b o u t th e c y lind er a x es a s w ell a s p erp end ic u la r mo v ement a t a b o u t 100 to th e c y lind er a x is. P assive refl ector W ith th e So na r p ro x imity sw itc h es o f c o mp a c t ra ng e M 3 0 K 3 , a 3 R X 1 9 10 p a ssiv e reflec to r c a n b e c la mp ed o nto th e senso r h ea d (see "A c c esso ries"). W h ere sp a c e is limited , o b jec ts c a n b e d etec ted w h ic h a re p erp end ic u la r to th e So na r p ro x imity sw itc h (w h ic h red u c es th e insta lla tio n d ep th ). T h e b lind z o ne is th en red u c ed b y a b o u t 6 c m.

2/ 54

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS400
Compact range M30 K3

I F u nction
Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.
Sonar-BERO
Sou nd c one Ob je c t

between the Sonar proximity switch and the reflector even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensors. It is only sensed whether an object is located between the emitter and receiver. The range of the system is doubled as compared to the range of an individual sensor. Program m ing
SONPROG

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M30 K3 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.

Blind z one

Se ns ing rang e

Sound cone

M odes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie

N SD 0 _ 0 0 7 5 6

Initial v alu e (ad ju s tab le )

Se t op e rating or analog rang e (L ED lit)

F inal v alu e (ad ju s tab le )

The main parameters that can be changed are: L ower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching rate L ower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling mean value generation E nd of close range E nd of sensing range Multiplex function Temperature compensation Sensitivity Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on req uest. The minimum ordering q uantity is 10 units.

I Tech nical specifications


Type Sensing range Standard target H ysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO contact NC contact No-load current U ltrasonic freq uency f Switching freq uency Response delay tv Power-up delay Switching status display E nclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage cm cm mm mm V mA mA mA kH z H z ms ms 3R G 61 . 2 3R G 61 . 3 3R G 61 . 5 3R G 61 . 4 3R G 61 76 80 ... 1000 10 10 80 15 ) 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 1 1 2 2 5 5 10 10 10 10 20 60 0.45 2 5 9 12 ... 300 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 V to 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20 % 300 150 or 300 (see table below) Max. 50 400 200 120 80 8 4 2 1 80 110 200 400 280 280 280 280 Y ellow L E D B rass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP65; IP68 with separate sensor C C 25 ... + 7 0 40 ... + 85 IP65

60 0.5 800 280 CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/55

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS400
Compact range M30 K3

I S election and Ord ering d ata


Sensing range cm Rated operational current mA 300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 2 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V B 3RG61 123B F00 B 3RG61 133B F00 B 3RG61 153B F00 B 3RG61 143B F00 3RG61 766B H 00 B 3RG61 123B E 00 B 3RG61 133B E 00 B 3RG61 153B E 00 B 3RG61 143B E 00 3RG61 766B G00 B 3RG61 123CF00 B 3RG61 133CF00 B 3RG61 153CF00 B 3RG61 143CF00 3RG61 766CH 00 B 3RG61 123CE 00 B 3RG61 133CE 00 B 3RG61 153CE 00 B 3RG61 143CE 00 3RG61 766CG00 B 3RG61 123GF00 B 3RG61 133GF00 B 3RG61 153GF00 B 3RG61 143GF00 3RG61 766GH 00 B 3RG61 123GE 00 B 3RG61 133GE 00 B 3RG61 153GE 00 B 3RG61 143GE 00 3RG61 766GG00 Analog output Order No.

Fixed sensor
3RG61 123..00 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 3RG61 133..00 6 ... 30

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 3RG61 153..00 6 ... 30

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 3RG61 143..00 6 ... 30

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 3RG61 766..00 6 ... 30

20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

2/56

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS400
Compact range M30 K3
Sensing range cm Rated operational current mA 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 150 150 300 300 150 150 300 300 150 150 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V B 3RG61 223BF00 B 3RG61 233BF00 B 3RG61 253BF00 B 3RG61 243BF00 B 3RG61 223BE00 B 3RG61 233BE00 B 3RG61 253BE00 B 3RG61 243BE00 B 3RG61 223CF00 B 3RG61 233CF00 B 3RG61 253CF00 B 3RG61 243CF00 B 3RG61 223CE00 B 3RG61 233CE00 B 3RG61 253CE00 B 3RG61 243CE00 B 3RG61 223GF00 B 3RG61 233GF00 B 3RG61 253GF00 B 3RG61 243GF00 B 3RG61 223GE00 B 3RG61 233GE00 B 3RG61 253GE00 B 3RG61 243GE00 B 3RG61 123BF01 3RG61 133BF01 B 3RG61 123BE01 3RG61 133BE01 B 3RG61 123CF01 3RG61 133CF01 B 3RG61 123CE01 3RG61 133CE01 B 3RG61 123GF01 3RG61 133GF01 B 3RG61 123GE01 3RG61 133GE01 3RX 4 000 Analog output Order No.

Swivel sensor
3RG61 253..00 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Separate sensor
3RG61 123..01 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 30 30 30 30 30 30 20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130

A ccessories
SON P ROG interface unit, 100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/57

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS400
Compact range M30 K3

I Dimensions
With fixed sensor
3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00
M 30x 1,5
33 19

3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34

3RG 6. 143..00
65 34

M 30x 1,5 SW 36

M 30x 1,5 SW 36

80

99

35 21

SW 36

131

27,3
NSD00778

27,3

150

27,3
10,5
NSD00780

10,5

NSD00779

M 12x 1

M 12x 1

M 12x 1

With swivel sensor


3RG 6. 223..00 3RG 6. 233..00
18 12 28 105 30
12

3RG 6. 253..00
18 34 100
47,5

3RG 6. 243..00
18 37 9 5 12 65
25

35

45
80

SW 36

80

80

SW 36 M 30x 1,5
NSD00783

131

M 30x 1,5

SW 36 M 30x 1,5
NSD00785

131

NSD00784

27,3 10,5

131

27,3 10,5

27,3
10,5

M 12x 1

M 12x 1

M 12x 1

With separate sensor


3RG 6. 123..01
C able length 1,6 m SW 24 25 M 18x 1

Spherical
3RG 6. 133..01
M 30x 1,5 C able length 1,6 m SW 36 25
138

3RG 61 766..00
NSD00781

10,5

101 153

160 8,5

112

26 10

160 90 69

SW 36 80

131 148

SW 36 80

M 30x 1,5

M 30x 1,5

27,3
NSD00786

27,3
NSD00787

10,5

M 12x 1

M 12x 1

I Schematics
Compact range M30 K3
NSD00764

1 2 3 4 5

L+ X I L-

NSD00765

10,5

131 148

1 2 3 4 5

L+

2 3
NSD00763a

1 5 4

Sw itch ing output


LX I

Sw itch ing output A nalog output

NO

A nalog output

NC

2/58

Siemens FS 10 2008

10

102

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS800
Compact range M18 ATEX

I Overview

I Design
The devices of compact range M18 are all supplied with permanently installed sensors in the longitudinal axis.

I Function
The devices are suitable for operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor and thru-beam sensor. The sensors can be supplied with switching, analog or frequency outputs. Up to 10 sensors of the M18 compact range can be synchronized with each other via the enable inputs. The devices are also suitable for multiplex mode. For a detailed description, see compact ranges M30 K2.
Type M18 ATEX

Programming
SONPROG

The sonar proximity switches of compact range M18 ATEX are ready-to-use, all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure. Sensors for Ex Z one 2/22 These sonar proximity switches are approved according to EU Directive 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII. The approval is for: - gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X and - dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C X Operates as diffuse sensor, thru-beam sensor and can be parameterized as a reflex sensor with SONPROG Adjustable via a potentiometer using SONPROG programming device Background suppression and can be set as foreground suppression with SONPROG Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - switching output - analog output - frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection via M12, 4-pin, type F connector

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M18 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.

The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.

I Technical specifications
Type M18 ATEX Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material cm cm mm mm V mA mA kHz Hz ms ms 3RG62 32-0XB. 3RG62 33-0XB. 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 11 22 10 1 2 12 ... 30 (including 10 % residual ripple; at 12 V to 20 V DC sensitivity reduced by up to 20%) 150 max. 60 400 200 5 4 100 120 280 280 Yellow LED 0XB4 Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface 0XB7 Stainless steel, CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil IP67 25 ... +70 40 ... +85

Degree of protection Ambient temperature during operation during storage

C C

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/59

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS800
Compact range M18 ATEX

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 150 Rated operational current mA 150 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 250 ... 1500 Hz 150 ... 1000 Hz 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 250 ... 1500 Hz 150 ... 1000 Hz 3RG62 323AB00-0XB4 A 3RG62 333AB00-0XB4 3RG62 323AA00-0XB4 A 3RG62 333AA00-0XB4 3RG62 323L S00-0XB4 3RG62 333L S00-0XB4 3RG62 323TS00-0XB4 3RG62 333TS00-0XB4 3RG62 323JS00-0XB4 3RG62 333JS00-0XB4 3RG62 323RS00-0XB4 3RG62 333RS00-0XB4 3RG62 323AB00-0XB7 3RG62 333AB00-0XB7 3RG62 323AA00-0XB7 3RG62 333AA00-0XB7 3RG62 323L S00-0XB7 3RG62 333L S00-0XB7 3RG62 323TS00-0XB7 3RG62 333TS00-0XB7 3RG62 323JS00-0XB7 3RG62 333JS00-0XB7 3RG62 323RS00-0XB7 3RG62 333RS00-0XB7 3RX4 000 Analog/ frequency output Order No.

Brass, nickel-plated, epoxy resin converter surface

Stainless steel, epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil

Accessories
SONPROG interface unit, 100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
3RG 62 3.3A.00
M 18x1 4

3RG 62 3.3.S00
M 18x1 4 104 (-3) 65
NSD00775

104 (-3) 65

SW 24 72,5 90,5

P oti
NSD0 00776

LED (4x)

LED (4x)

I Schematics
NSD00759 NSD00760

SW 24 90,5

View from rear onto device


1 2 3 4 L+ Output LXI
2 3
NSD01042a

L+ XI LOutput

2 3 4

1 4

NO or freq uency output

NC

2/60

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS800
Compact range M30 K3 ATEX

I Overview

Sonar-BERO

Sound cone

Object

Blind zone

Sensing range

NSD0_00756

Initial value (adjustable)

Set operating or analog range (LED lit)

Final value (adjustable)

Sound cone

O perating modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor
M30 K3 ATEX type with fixed sensor

The compact range M30 K3 ATEX sonar proximity switches are ready-to-use, all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capabilities. Sensors for Ex Zone 2/22 These sonar proximity switches are approved according to EU Directive 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII. The approval is for: - gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X and - dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C X Operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via 2 potentiometers using SONPROG programming device Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - switching outputs - analog output Connection via M12, 5-pin, type G connector

If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the sonar proximity switch and the reflector, even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensor It is only sensed whether an object is located between the emitter and receiver. The range of the system is doubled compared to the range of a single sensor. Programming For optimum adaptation to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M30 K3 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.
SONPROG

I Design
Passive reflector With the sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K3 ATEX, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm.

The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of blind zone End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.

I Function
Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false signals. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/61

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS800
Compact range M30 K3 ATEX

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO NC No-load current Ultrasonic frequency f Switching frequency Response time tv Time delay before availability Switching status display Enclosure material cm cm mm mm V mA mA mA kHz Hz ms ms 3RG61 .2-0XB. 3RG61 .3-0XB. 3RG61 .5-0XB. 3RG61 .4-0XB. 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 11 22 55 10 10 10 10 20 60 0.45 2 5 9 12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20 %) 300 150 or 300 (see table below) max. 50 400 200 120 80 8 4 2 1 80 110 200 400 280 280 280 280 Yellow LED 0XB4 Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface 0XB7 Stainless steel, CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil IP65 25 ... +70 40 ... +85

Degree of protection Ambient temperature during operation during storage

C C

2/62

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS800
Compact range M30 K3 ATEX

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm 3RG61 123..00 6 ... 30 Rated operational current mA 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 Switching output pnp 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 123BF00-0XB4 3RG61 133BF00-0XB4 3RG61 153BF00-0XB4 3RG61 143BF00-0XB4 3RG61 123BE00-0XB4 3RG61 133BE00-0XB4 3RG61 153BE00-0XB4 3RG61 143BE00-0XB4 3RG61 123CF00-0XB4 3RG61 133CF00-0XB4 3RG61 153CF00-0XB4 3RG61 143CF00-0XB4 3RG61 123CE00-0XB4 3RG61 133CE00-0XB4 3RG61 153CE00-0XB4 3RG61 143CE00-0XB4 3RG61 123GF00-0XB4 3RG61 133GF00-0XB4 3RG61 153GF00-0XB4 3RG61 143GF00-0XB4 3RG61 123GE00-0XB4 3RG61 133GE00-0XB4 3RG61 153GE00-0XB4 3RG61 143GE00-0XB4 3RG61 123BF00-0XB7 3RG61 133BF00-0XB7 3RG61 153BF00-0XB7 3RG61 143BF00-0XB7 3RG61 123BE00-0XB7 3RG61 133BE00-0XB7 3RG61 153BE00-0XB7 3RG61 143BE00-0XB7 3RG61 123CF00-0XB7 3RG61 133CF00-0XB7 3RG61 153CF00-0XB7 3RG61 143CF00-0XB7 3RG61 123CE00-0XB7 3RG61 133CE00-0XB7 3RG61 153CE00-0XB7 3RG61 143CE00-0XB7 3RG61 123GF00-0XB7 3RG61 133GF00-0XB7 3RG61 153GF00-0XB7 3RG61 143GF00-0XB7 3RG61 123GE00-0XB7 3RG61 133GE00-0XB7 3RG61 153GE00-0XB7 3RG61 143GE00-0XB7 3RX4 000 Analog output Order No.

Brass, nickel-plated, epoxy resin converter surface


20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 3RG61 133..00 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 3RG61 153..00 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 3RG61 143..00 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 3RG61 123..00 6 ... 30

Stainless steel, epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil


20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 3RG61 133..00 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 3RG61 153..00 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 3RG61 143..00 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

Accessories
SONPROG interface unit, 100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/63

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS800
Compact range M30 K3 ATEX

I Dimensions
With fixed sensor
3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00
M 30x1,5
33 19

3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34

3RG 6. 143..00
65 34

M 30x1,5 SW 36

99

M 30x1,5 SW 36

80

35 21

SW 36

131

27,3
NSD00778
NSD00779

27,3

150

27,3
10,5
NSD00780

10,5

M 12x1

M 12x1

M 12x1

I Schematics
Compact range M30 K3 ATEX
NSD00764

1 2 3 4 5

L+ XI L-

NSD00765

1 2 3 4 5

L+

10,5

101 153

2 3
NSD00763a

1 5 4

Switching output
LXI

Switching output Analog output

Analog output

NO

NC

2/64

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS900
Double-layer sheet monitoring

I Overview

The spacing between the emitter and receiver must be at least 20 mm and can be up to 60 mm. Precise alignment is essential (1). The operating range is reduced if they are not aligned along the axis.

. . .

. . .

. . .

2
N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 3 0 a

Sensor mounting

I Function
These devices are used mainly for monitoring sheets of paper as well as plastic and metal film. Each sheet is compared to the stored reference value and indicated as a single or double sheet accordingly. The 3RX2 210 signal evaluator continuously signals the situation between the Sonar sensors at the two outputs A1 and A2. Output A1 "Single sheet" remains active as long as only one sheet is located between the sensors. Output A2 "Double sheet" is activated as soon as two or more sheets are detected between the sensors. Two LEDs also indicate the status of the outputs. The yellow LED A1 indicates a single sheet and the red LED A2 indicates a double sheet. Programming The signal evaluator can be set to two different modes.
S E N D R E C

Double-layer sheet monitoring with separate sensors

The 3RX2 210 Sonar proximity switch for double-layer sheet monitoring comprises one signal evaluator and two Sonar sensors (emitter and receiver). Reliable detection of multiple layers of paper, plastic sheets or metal foil Measuring range from 20 g/m2 paper to 1100 g/m2 cardboard Manual or automatic offset Sonar sensors in M18 enclosure Short-circuit proof electronic outputs (pnp) Connection via M12 connector

I Design
The emitter and receiver sensors are of the same type and must be mounted at an angle of 30 (10) or 5 to the vertical. The setting is made using the internal S2 switch. If the system is operated at an inclination angle of 5 to 20, the S2 switch (operating mode) must be set to position "1".
S S 2

I E

1 0

S L E E

E D D

T A A 2 1

1
0 1

The object to be detected must be located approximately 5 to 15 mm above the emitter. A wider mounting angle increases the flutter range, e.g. at an angle of 40, fluttering within 60% of the measuring range is permitted.
M

U A D E I N G E R M A N Y

. . 3

0 V

T
N

User interface

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/65

Sonar Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXS900
Double-layer sheet monitoring
Manual setting Switch S1 (setting) is in position "1". The sensor is set up for the material to be sensed either by pressing the "SET" button on the top of the device or by applying a control command to the "SET" input of the M12 connector (pin 5). The value obtained remains stored until the setting procedure is repeated. The sensor is set by placing a single sheet between the Sonar sensors and activating the "SET" command. The 3RX2 210 requires max. 100 ms for the setting; i.e. the "SET" key must be pressed for this time, or a "1" signal (> 6 V) must be present at pin 5. The green LED "SET" flashes during the setting. It lights up permanently following successful setting. Automatic setting Switch S1 (setting) is in position "0" (factory setting). Setting can be performed as described above or automatically when a sheet is fed in and the supply voltage is applied if a sheet lies between the sensors at this moment. Automatic setting is performed when a sheet is fed in following an interval of 2s during which a sheet was not detected between the Sonar sensors.

I Technical specifications
Type Sensing range Material strength (paper, cardboard) Operational voltage (DC) No-load current I0 Switching output Rated operational current Ie Voltage drop at 200 mA Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Evaluation unit Sensor Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage mm g/m2 V mA mA V kHz Hz ms ms Double-layer sheet monitoring 20 ... 60 20 ... 1100 18 ... 36 (including 10% residual ripple) < 75 200 < 3 200 100 5 100 Red and yellow LEDs Metal Brass, nickel-plated; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 C C 0 ... +65 40 ... +85

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range cm 2 ... 6 Double-layer sheet monitoring Rated operational current mA 200 Switching output pnp 2 NO Wiring Order No. M12 connector 3RX2 210

I Dimensions
Evaluation unit
84 64 16 4,3 37 13

Sensor
~ 2000 M8
2,5

25 M 18 x 1

24 M8

NSD01132

78 98

74

5 13

NSD01131

10

M 12 x 1

2/66

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Accessories
SONPROG interface device

I Overview

The programmed values are saved in the Sonar proximity switch and are retained even without interface or after the supply voltage has been disconnected. The programmed values can be printed out and recorded. They will then be immediately available, for example for series applications or for replacement of the Sonar proximity switch. Parameters Operating range The commands "Lower limit of operating range" and "Upper limit of operating range" are used to define a window within the sensing range of the Sonar proximity switch. If an object enters the operating range, the switching output is active (with NO contact). If an object is outside the operating range, the switching output is not active. In the case of Sonar proximity switch of compact range M30 K2 with two switching outputs, the second switching output is active when an object is located between the blind zone and the operating range.
Sonar-BERO
Sound cone Object

PC with SONPROG programming unit and Sonar proximity switch

Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 PC programming unit SONPROG and the relevant software, the following Sonar proximity switches can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements: Compact ranges II and III Compact range M18 K65 compact form Scope of supply PC-Interface, Plug-in power supply Connecting leads to the PC and Sonar proximity switch SONPROG software for Windows.

Blind zone

Sensing range

Sound cone

Differential travel The differential travel can be adjusted to move the switch-on point and the switch-off point at the limits of the operating range away from each other. This prevents output flutter and level control tasks can be solved elegantly.

BERO

I Function
The SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device allows the user to program several Sonar proximity switches simultaneously. The lower and upper limit of the operating range can be saved at the click of a button for copying to other Sonar proximity switches. For each Sonar proximity switch, the following parameters can be set: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Attenuation. The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Function as diffuse or reflex sensor Fill level mode

4 1

Differential travel
2 3

5 6 7

Differential travel Container


NSD0_01192a

1) Inhibit range 2) Operating range 3) Sensing range 4) Blind zone 5) Switching output upper limit when fill level is falling 6) Switching output upper limit when fill level is rising 7) Switching output lower limit when fill level is falling 8) Switching output lower limit when fill level is rising

Example: Fill level monitoring with adjustable differential travel

Switching element function The function of the switching output that was set at the factory can be changed, e.g. from NO to NC. The assignment of the connections does not change as a result. This means that when a device with NO function is changed to NC, the switching output remains assigned to pin 4.

NSD0_00756

Initial value (adjustable)

Set operating or analog range (LED lit)

Final value (adjustable)

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/67

Sonar Proximity Switches


Accessories
SONPROG interface device
Switching rate The Sonar proximity switch can be switched over from standard switching frequency (in accordance with the technical specifications) and rapid switching frequency (3 times the standard value). Note: A Sonar proximity switch with a rapid switching frequency is more sensitive to disturbance.
NSD0_00801

Attenuation (see sound cones) The susceptibility of the receive amplifier is reduced here. Weakly reflecting objects at the edge of the sound cone are suppressed. It is also possible to reduce the size of the sound cone here electronically. The permitted values are 0 (maximum sensitivity) to 7 (minimum sensitivity).

I Technical specifications
Type Req uired hardware Req uired software 3RX4 000 PC with VGA graphics card, serial interface COM1 or COM2 MS-DOS Version 3.1 and higher, Windows 3.X, Windows 95, 98, Windows NT 100 V to 240 V AC, 24 V DC

Analog distance measurement Proximity switches with an analog output can detect the distance to an object. This distance is converted into a proportional analog output signal (0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA). The resolution of the analog output is at least 1 mm within the preset limits.
R i s c h a i n r a g c t e r i s t i c

Operational voltage

Software-Update via Internet: www.siemens.de/simatic-sensors/px

I Selection and Ordering data


Designation Order No. 3RX4 000 SONPROG interface unit

a h a

l l i n r a

g c t e r i s t i c

A P
I n v 5 a 0 i t i a l u c e v m 9 S e r a n n s g i n e g

1
l F a 0

P
i n l u c a

2
l e m

Example

Blind zone A value must not be set for the blind zone that is less than the minimum value. This is the time that the Sonar proximity switch requires to switch over from send to receive mode. The blind zone can be moved away from the Sonar proximity switch (i.e. increased) to permit interfering objects in the foreground to be ignored. The interfering echo resulting from such an object is suppressed by extending the blind zone, and detection of the desired object is possible again. The range of the Sonar proximity switch can be reduced in this case because part of the echo from the object to be detected is suppressed. However, objects are still not permitted within the original blind zone. It is important to ensure with this setting the object does not reflect ultrasound so well that double or triple echoes arise that give the impression of a more distant object. (a fault of this kind cannot occur during normal operation because only the first echo is accepted as valid). Sensing range Reducing the sensing range can enhance the resolution of the Sonar proximity switch. With large sensing ranges, it is not possible to adjust some values in steps of one millimeter. The minimum resolution of a Sonar proximity switch is 1 mm. Mean value generation Unfortunate reflective conditions or moving surfaces (e.g. in the case of moving liquids and bulk material on conveyors) can cause the measured values to change continuously, which results in constant switching. The Sonar proximity switch allows a mean value to be generated from up to 255 measurements. Failed signals (when no object is in the sensing range) are ignored on mean-value generation. After each measurement, a mean value is generated immediately from the new measured value and the stored number of old values. The response time of the Sonar proximity switch is, therefore, not extended. A delay only occurs at the end of a measurement if the object is removed from the sensing range. This delay corresponds to the measurement cycle time multiplied by the saved number of mean values.

2/68

Siemens FS 10 2008

Sonar Proximity Switches


Accessories
Mounting accessories

I Selection and Ordering data


Designation
2 9 5,5 6 1 2

Order No. 3RX1 301

Aligning unit with mounting bracket for Sonar proximity switch M30 Swivel range approx. 20 around longitudinal axis of proximity switch. Following assignment, the proximity switch is screwed tight in the selected position.

7 0 8 4 5,5 6 1

2 0 2 7

NSD01025

50

Aligning unit with mounting flange for Sonar proximity switch M30 Swivel range approx. 20 around longitudinal axis of proximity switch. Following assignment, the proximity switch is screwed tight in the selected position.
2

3RX1 302

N S D0 1 0 2 6

7 0 8 4

2 9

Passive reflector for Sonar proximity switch M30


6 2 7 6

3RX1 910

3 0 4 1
f d

N S D0 1 0 2 8

3 4

N S D 01021

Mounting clamp (molded plastic) for Sonar proximity switch, M18 form for Sonar proximity switch, M30 form 3SX6 283 3SX6 284

3SX6 283 3SX6 284


b c

a b c d e f g

45 30 26 4 ,5 32 1 9 ,6 1 8,0 (fo r M 1 8)

58 30 36 4 ,5 44 1 9 ,6 29 ,8 (fo r M 30 ) 3SX6 287

65

Aligning unit for 3SG16 67 Sonar proximity switch

80

N S D 00782

52

For plug-in connectors and extension cables see from page 2/248.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/69

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
O p to p roxi mi ty sw i tch es fast an d accu rate sen si ng w i th l i g h t an d l aser
C o n fig u rato r A A p p configu rator for op tical p rox imity sw itch es is av ailable in th e & D Mall. B ased on th e tech nical featu res req u ired, th e desired rodu ct can be q u ick ly and easily selected, p laced in th e sh op ing cart and ordered.

A dditional information is av ailable in th e Internet u nder: www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

I A p p licatio n

T h e v ariou s v ersions of th e O p to p rox imity sw itch es are p redominantly u sed in th e follow ing ap p lications: In conv ey or sy stems In p ack aging mach ines In mech anical engineering In p ap er, tex tile and p lastics p rocessing In p rinting mach ines For access control. T h ese p h otoelectric sensors detect all objects regardless of th eir comp osition, w h eth er metal, w ood or p lastic. Sp ecial v ersions of th e K 20 form in miniatu re enclosu re and th e C 40 are av ailable for detecting transp arent objects. Sp ecial dev ices su ch as th e color sensor or color mark reader can be u sed to detect differences in color or contrast. T h e analog laser su p p orts ex tremely p recise distance measu rements and p osition monitoring. S en so rs fo r E x Z o n e 2/ 22 T h e K 80 A T E X op tical p rox imity sw itch is ap p rov ed according to E U G u ideline 94/9/E G (A T E X) A p p endix V III T h e ap p rov al is for: G as E X II 3G E E x nA II T 6x and D u st E X II 3D IP 65 T 80 C x T h e fu nctionality of th e op tical p rox imity sw itch es w ith A T E X ap p rov al is identical to th at of th e standard p rox imity sw itch es. S afety-rel ated ap p l icatio n s T h e u se of th e sensors is not p ermissible for ap p lications in w h ich th e safety of p ersons is dep endent on th e fu nction of th e p rox imity sw itch .
NSD0_00801

P u re op tical astu teness th is is w h at distingu ish es th ese ex tremely p recise, q u ick -acting and accu rately p in-p ointing op tical p rox imity sw itch es. T h is is su p p lemented by first-class ease of adju stment u sing a teach -in fu nction or p otentiometer and easiest p ossible h andling du ring op eration. W ith th e w ide range of different designs, from cu bic to cy lindrical righ t dow n to miniatu re designs and different ty p es, e.g. as diffu se sensors w ith or w ith ou t back grou nd su p p ression, retroreflectiv e or th ru -beam sensors, th ey master any task w ith a range of u p to 50 m su p erbly .

H ig h lig h t s
E x tremely p recise and q u ick -acting w ith p in-p oint locating ability Max imu m p erformance ev en ov er large distances Small, comp act enclosu re D egree of p rotection u p to IP 68 A dju stable ranges E asy commissioning (teach -in) Su itable for global u se (U L /C SA ) PXO series T h e op tical p rox imity sw itch es are organiz ed in different p rodu ct families in accordance w ith th eir tech nical ty p e and design:
SI M ATI C sen so rs V ersi on C y lindrical v ersion, mini C y lindrical v ersions C u bic v ersion, mini C u bic v ersion, small C u bic v ersion C u bic v ersion, large Sp ecial dev ice amp lifiers D esi gn D 4, M5, M12 M18, M18S, L 18 K 21, K 21R , K 20, L 20, C 20 K 31, K 30 C 40, L 50, L 50H F, L 50H F adv ., C 50 K 80, L 80H F, L 90L G L , LV 7 0

I D esig n
T h e dev ices can be mou nted in any p osition. T h ey sh ou ld be installed in su ch a manner as to p rev ent dirt dep osits as far as p ossible. T h e av ailable accessories enable th e dev ices to be mou nted easily and correctly . Al ig n m en t D iffu se sensor T h e sensor mu st be aligned w ith th e object to be sensed to ensu re reliable sw itch ing. In dev ices th at h av e a su rp lu s ligh t fu nction, th e relev ant L E D mu st be activ e.

P X O 100 P X O 200 P X O 300 P X O 400 P X O 500 P X O 600 P X O 800

2/70

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
Retroreflective sensors Place the reflector at the required location and secure it firmly. Cover the reflector with adhesive tape so that only the center (approximately 25% of the surface) remains free. Install the retroreflective sensor so that it switches reliably. Finally remove the adhesive tape from the reflector. Thru-beam sensors Place the receiver in the required position and secure it firmly. Align the emitter with the receiver as accurately as possible. Minimum clearance The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. Therefore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sensors. The following distances are recommended values only. The values given are for maximum sensitivity. Setting th e operating distance Sensitivity is either adjusted using a built-in potentiometer or taught by means of a teach-in function. When a potentiometer is used, turning clockwise increases sensitivity and thus the achievable operating distance. Diffuse sensor and diffuse sensor with background suppression The object is positioned in front of the sensor inside its sensing range. Set the sensitivity, or distance, in such a way that the object to be scanned is sure to be sensed. If necessary, the surplus light display (green LED) must be active. The object must then be removed. If the output remains on, sensitivity must be reduced. In devices with teach-in function, sensitivity is adjusted automatically. During this process, the sensor is taught the two states "Object there" and "Object not there" by pressing the keys. Retroreflective sensors and thru-beam sensors In normal cases, the sensor is always operated with sensitivity at maximum. This produces the maximum surplus light. It is usually only necessary to reduce sensitivity for sensing very small or transparent objects. The procedure is the same as for diffuse sensors. Cab le length
NSD00795

Diffuse sensor

Long cables between the devices result in: Additional capacitive loading (short-circuit protection) Increased injection of interference. For this reason the specified maximum cable length must not be exceeded.
a

I F unction
D iffuse sensor (energetic sensor) The light from the emitter falls on an object and is reflected in a diffuse pattern. Part of this reflected light reaches the receiver located in the same device. If the intensity of the received light is sufficient, the output is switched. The sensing range depends on the size and color of the object involved as well as its surface texture. The sensing range can be varied within a wide range by means of the built-in potentiometer. The energetic sensor can therefore also be used to detect different colors.

NSD00796

Retroreflective sensor

NSD00797

Thru-beam sensor
Opto proximity switches D4/M5 M12 M18 K31 K30 K80 L18 (laser light barrier) L50 (laser light scanner) L50 (laser light barrier) C50 (color sensor)
1)

Dimension a 50 mm 250 mm 250 mm 250 mm 750 mm 500 mm 150 mm 1) 30 mm 80 mm 500 mm

D iffuse sensor w ith b ackground suppression Diffuse sensors with background suppression can detect objects up to a specific sensing range. All objects beyond this range are suppressed. The focus level can be adjusted. The background is suppressed due to the geometric constellation between the emitter and the receiver.

Focusing at 50 m.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/71

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction

Retroreflective sensors The light from the emitter diode is focused through a lens and directed via a polarization filter to a reflector (principle of a 3-way mirror). Part of the reflected light passes through another polarization filter and reaches the receiver. The filters are selected and aligned in such a way that only the light reflected from the reflector reaches the receiver and not the light reflected from other objects within the beam range. An object that interrupts the light beam from the emitter through the reflector to the receiver causes the output to switch.

L aser diffuse sensor with analog output The analog laser proximity switch can measure the exact distance of an object within its sensing range. Due to the use of visible laser light, the measurement is highly accurate and the output is extremely linear. All laser proximity switches belong to safety class 2, i.e. they are harmless and can be used without any risk to health (e.g. to the eyes).

Color sensors The color sensor functions with an incandescent LED, which illuminates the object. T hru-beam sensors Thru-beam sensors comprise an emitter and a receiver. The emitter is aligned in such a way that the greatest possible amount of pulsed light from the emitter diode reaches the receiver. The receiver evaluates the incoming light to clearly separate it from the ambient light and other light sources. Any interruption of the light beam between emitter and receiver causes the output to switch. During sensor adjustment, the light reflected from the object is measured and assigned to the appropriate output. The recognized color is stored in the device in a non-volatile memory, and is immediately available even when the sensor has been switched off and on again. Either three independent colors or one color scale can be saved and evaluated. The measured color value (RGB) is not available. Color mark sensor The color mark sensor uses green or red emitted light. The color is selected automatically depending on the contrast. The mark color and the background color can be set separately by means of two keys.

Devices for fiber-optic conductors Optical fibers are fitted in front of the emitter and receiver. They represent the "extended eye" of the Opto proximity switch. As optical fibers are very small and flexible, they provide a practical solution to the problem of sensing at points that are not easily accessible. Furthermore no electrical potential is transferred.

2/72

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
I Technical specifications
The table lists data which are independent of the design
Type Voltage drop at 200 mA Operating capacity Reverse current of outputs Power-up delay Hysteresis (typical) for diffuse sensors Repeat accuracy for diffuse sensors Ambient light limit Sunlight Halogen light Precautions Overload protection Overvoltage protection Short-circuit protection Permissible cable length m Lux Lux V mA mA ms Solid-state output Max. 2.0 Max. 200 Max. 0.1 Max. 20 10% 5 % of operating distance Solid-state output 2000 Max. 300 10% Devices with laser Max. 2.4 Max. 200 Max. 0.1 Max. 300 5%

2
Back-up fuse required Max. 250 Max. 100

10.000 3.000 Max. 250

For further technical specifications, see the respective type

I Schematics
Block diagram 1
NSD00867a

Block diagram 2
NSD00873a

B N (1) + U b
4

BK
1 3

(4)

s w itch in g an alo g

M8 connector, Type A, C, D Cable

B N (1)
4

+ Ub E n able in p u t 0V

BK
1 3

(4)

M8 connector, Type A, C, D Cable

B U (3) 0 V

B U (3)

Block diagram 3
B N (1)
2 1 3 4

Block diagram 4
+ Ub O u tp u t dark -O N O u tp u t ligh t-O N 0V

W H (2) B K (4) B U (3)

M8 connector, Type B Cable

B N (1)
2 1 3 4

+ Ub O u tp u t s u rp lu s ligh t O u tp u t ligh t-O N 0V

W H (2) BK (4) B U (3)

M8 connector, Type B, 4-pole Cable

NSD00868b

Block diagram 5
NSD0 00869a

2 3

1 4

B N (1) W H (2) BK (4) B U (3)

+ Ub

O u tp u t dark -O N O u tp u t ligh t-O N


0V

M12 connector, Type F, K, L Cable

NSD00874a

Block diagram 6
B N (1)
2 3 1 4

+ Ub O u tp u t s u rp lu s ligh t O u tp u t ligh t-O N/dark -O N 0V

W H (2) BK (4) B U (3)

M12 connector, Type F, K, L Cable

Block diagram 7
NSD0 00870a

NSD00876a

B N (1)
2 3 1 4

+ Ub

BK

(4)

E n able in p u t
0V

M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J , K, L Cable

NSD00875a

Block diagram 8
B N (1)
2 3 1 4

+U b O u tp u t s u rp lu s ligh t O u tp u t ligh t-O N/dark -O N 0V E n able in p u t

W H (2) BK (4) B U (3) G R (5)

M12 connector, Type G, M

B U (3)

Block diagram 9
NSD00871a

Block diagram 10 M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J , K, L, M Cable


( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ) ) s w i t c h i n g ) a ) ) U
C

B N (1) + Ub
2 3 1 4

Screw-type terminals
= 1 l o g 5 . . . 2 6 4 V n a

B U (3) 0 V

( 5

Block diagram 11
NSD00878

Block diagram 12
NSD00879

B N (1) W H (2) BK (4) B U (3) G R (5)

+U b O u tp u t s u rp lu s ligh t O u tp u t ligh t-O N/dark -O N 0V E n able in p u t

Screw-type terminals

B N (1)
2 3 1 4

+ Ub O u tp u t ligh t-O N/dark -O N

BK

(4)

M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J , K, L, N Cable

B U (3)

0V

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/73

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction

Block diagram 13
NSD00886

Block diagram 14
NSD0 01084

BN (1)
2 3 1 4

+ Ub Output light-ON/dark-ON 0V

WH (2) BU (3)

M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable

BN (1)
2 1 4 WH (2)

+ U b DC 10 ... 30 V P rogram m ing 0V Switching output light-ON/dark-ON

M8 connector, Type B, 4-pole

BU (3)
3 BK (4)

Block diagram 15
NSD00894

Block diagram 16
+ Ub + Ua _ Ua 0V Shielding

BN WH YE GN

Cable

P
2 1

I N P P I N I N P I N 4 3 2

1 : : :

: + P 0 S

7
b

r o V w l i g h

r a

i n

M12 connector, Type G, M

2
F S10_00207

3 4

i t c t - O

i n N

g / d a

u r k

t p - O

u N

Block diagram 17
5 6 7 1 8 2 4 3
BN (2) +Ub WH (1) Blanking GR (5) Interlock P K (6) Output 3 RD (8) Y E (4) Output 2 GN (3) Output 1 BU (7) 0 V

Block diagram 18 M12 connector, 8-pole, Type O


B W B B O K R U S A N + H 0 w n a P 7
b

D g r a

C m m

0 i n

. . . g

Cable

r o V

i t c l o

h g

i n o

g u

o t p

u u

t p t 0

l i g . . . 1

h 0

t - O V

/ d

r k

- O

Block diagram 19
B W
1

Block diagram 20
( 1 ) ) ) ) ) O A n O 0 u a + 7
b

N H B B K G Y U

( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5

u V

t p

l i g

t - O

/ d

r k

- O

M12 connector, Type F, G


N

5 6 4 8 1 2 3 7
W

B G P R Y G B E K

N H R D N U

( L ( R ( R ( 6 ( 8 ( 4 ( L ( 3 ) )

+ S S ) ) )

) 4 4 8 8

( 2 5 5

) ) ) ( 1 ( 5 ) )

M8 socket connector, Type O, 8-pole

t p l o

u g

A o

1 u

, t p

l i g u t

h 4

t - O m

N A

/ d

a . . .

r k 2 0

- O m

( 7

BK = black BN = brown

BU = blue GR = gray GY = gray

OR = orange RD = red

WH YE

= white = yellow

PK GN

= pink = green

2/74

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
I Characteristic curves
Types of construction D4 and M5
Diffuse sensor
S(m ) 6 0 5 0 4 0 30 2 0 1 0
N SD 008 9 6 a

Thru-beam sensor
S(m ) a
S

0, 30 0, 2 5

N SD008 9 7 a

a 0, 2 0 0, 1 5 0, 1 0 0, 05
S

2
8 0 4 0 0 4 0 8 0 a( m m )

2 0

1 0

1 0

2 0

a( m m )

Type of construction M12


Diffuse sensor
S(m ) 0, 4
N SD008 9 8 a

Retroreflective sensor
a
S

Thru-beam sensor
S(m )
N SD008 9 9 a

2 ,0 1 ,6

a
S

4 ,5

S(m )
N SD009 00a

0, 3

3, 5

a
S

1 ,4 1 ,0 0, 2 0, 6 1 ,5 0, 1 0, 2 2 ,5

2 0

1 0

1 0

2 0 a( m m )

4 0

2 0

2 0

4 0 a( m m )

300

1 5 0

1 5 0

300 a ( m m )

Type of construction M18


Diffuse sensor
S(m ) 0, 8
N SD009 01 a

Retroreflective sensor
a
S

Thru-beam sensor
N SD009 02 a

2 ,4

S(m ) a
S

7 ,0

S(m )
N SD009 03a

0, 6

1 ,8

5 ,0

a
S

0, 4

1 ,2

3, 0

0, 2

0, 6

1 ,0

8 0

4 0

4 0

8 0 a( m m )

4 0

2 0

2 0

4 0 a( m m )

6 00

300

300

6 00 a ( m m )

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/75

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
Types of construction K 30 and K 31
Diffuse sensor
S (m)
NSD00904

Retroreflective sensor
a
S

Thru-beam sensor
S (m)
NSD00905

4,0

a
S

2 0

S(m )
NSD00906a

1,2

3,0

1 6 1 2

0,9 2,0

0,6 1,0

8 4

0,3

200

100 Series K30 Series K31

100

200 a (mm)

80

40

40

80 a (mm)

800

400

400

800 a ( m m )

Series K30 Series K31

Se r i e s K 3 0 Se r i e s K 3 1

Type of construction K 80
Diffuse sensor
2 ,4 2 ,0 1 ,6 1,2 0,8 0,4 S(m )
N SD 009 1 0a

Retroreflective sensor
S(m ) a
S

Thru-beam sensor
S(m )
N SD009 1 1 a

6 ,0 5 ,0 4 ,0 3 ,0 2 ,0 1 ,0

a
S

6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0

N SD009 1 2 b

4 00

2 00

2 00

4 00 a ( m m )

80

4 0

4 0

80 a ( m m )

2 000 1 000

1 000

2 000 a ( m m )

2/76

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
I M o re in fo rm atio n
Glossary for optical proximity switches T erms a sso c ia ted w ith th e tec h no lo g y o f p h o to elec tric p ro x imity sw itc h es a re ex p la ined b elo w . So me o f th e terms a re d efined in IE C 6 09 4 7 -5 -2. A n ti-in terferen ce fu n ction T h is fu nc tio n p rev ents mu tu a l interferenc e b etw een o p to p ro x imity sw itc h es. T h e sp ec ified c lea ra nc es b etw een th e d ev ic es d o es no t h a v e to b e o b serv ed fo r d ev ic es w ith a n a nti-interferenc e fu nc tio n. It is th erefo re p o ssib le to a lig n tw o reflex senso rs, fo r ex a mp le, w ith a c o mmo n reflec to r. F u n ction of the ou tpu ts D a rk -O N T h e "d a rk -O N " fu nc tio n mea ns th a t th is o u tp u t is c o nd u c ting (c u rrent-c a rry ing ) w h en n o lig h t rea c h es th e rec eiv er. L ig h t-O N T h e "lig h t-O N " fu nc tio n mea ns th a t th is o u tp u t is c o nd u c ting (c u rrent-c a rry ing ) w h en lig h t rea c h es th e rec eiv er. A ntiv a lent T h e d ev ic es w ith a ntiv a lent o u tp u t h a v e 2 o u tp u ts. O ne o u tp u t is d ark-O N , a nd th e o th er is l i g h t-O N . Su rp lu s lig h t A s a n a lterna tiv e, so me d ev ic es c a n b e su p p lied w ith a d ifferent c o nfig u ra tio n o f o u tp u ts, o ne o u tp u t lig h t-O N a nd th e o th er fo r sig na ling th e su rp lu s lig h t. O u tpu t cu rren t T h e d ev ic es a re d esig ned fo r a ma x imu m o u tp u t c u rrent (ra ted o p era ting c u rrent, see T ec h nic a l sp ec ific a tio ns). If th is c u rrent is ex c eed ed , ev en b riefly , th e b u ilt-in o v erlo a d a nd sh o rt-c irc u it p ro tec tio n w ill b e a c tiv a ted . D estru c tio n o f th e d ev ic e is effec tiv ely p rev ented . Inc a nd esc ent la mp s, c a p a c ito rs a nd o th er stro ng ly c a p a c itiv e lo a d s (e.g . lo ng lea d s) h a v e a simila r effec t to a n o v erlo a d . A minimu m lo a d c u rrent (sma llest o p era ting c u rrent) is no t req u ired . A b u ilt-in p u ll-u p resisto r ensu res th a t a n o u tp u t sig na l is a lw a y s a v a ila b le. A u to-collimation W ith th ese d ev ic es, th e o p tic a l a x es o f th e emitter a nd rec eiv er a re id entic a l. T h e d ev ic e o nly h a s o ne o p tic a l a x is. T h is mea ns th a t th ere is no b lind z o ne ra ng e in fro nt o f th e p ro x imity sw itc h a nd th e a c c u ra c y o f th e sw itc h ing p o int is h ig h er. S pu riou s sig n al su ppression T h e d ev ic es fea tu re sp u rio u s sig na l su p p ressio n. It p rev ents th e o c c u rrenc e o f sp u rio u s sig na ls fro m th e mo ment o f a p p lic a tio n o f th e o p era ting v o lta g e u ntil th e mo ment w h en th e d ev ic e is rea d y fo r o p era tio n (a p p ro x ima tely 5 ms). S en sin g ran g e T h e sensing ra ng e is th e ra ng e w ith in w h ic h th e o p era ting d ista nc e c a n b e set. T h is term rep la c es a ny o th er p rev io u sly u sed terms (sensing ra ng e/tra nsmissio n ra ng e). C o rrec tio n fa c to rs T h e sp ec ified sensing ra ng es o f d iffu se senso rs a re a c h iev ed w ith th e sp ec ified su rfa c es b y u sing ma tte w h ite sta nd a rd p a p er. T h e fo llo w ing c o rrec tio n fa c to rs (a p p ro x ima te v a lu es) a p p ly to o th er su rfa c es:
T est c a rd
W h ite p a p er L ig h t-c o lo red w o o d W h ite p la stic C o rk P rinted new sp a p er P V C , g ra y B la c k p la stic 100 % 80 % 73 % 70% 65 % 60% 57 % 22 % B la c k neo p rene A u to mo b ile tires Sh eet a lu minu m 20 % 15 % 200 % 15 0 % 120 % 23 0 %

ra w b la c k , a no d iz ed ma tte (b ru sh ed )
Sta inless steel, p o lish ed

E n ab lin g in pu t W ith o p to p ro x imity sw itc h es w ith a test inp u t, th e emitter c a n b e sw itc h ed o n o r o ff. Fu nc tio n mo nito ring c a n b e imp lemented w ith a p p ro p ria te ev a lu a tio n o f th e o u tp u t sig na l (lig h t b a rrier: no o b stru c tio n o f lig h t b ea m / d iffu se senso rs: reflec ting o b jec t ex ists). T o d isa b le th e p ro x imity sw itc h , th e ena b ling inp u t mu st b e c o nnec ted to 0 V . T h e ena b ling inp u t d o es no t h a v e to b e u sed fo r o p era tio n. A mb ien t lig ht limit A mb ient lig h t is th e lig h t p ro d u c ed b y ex terna l lig h t so u rc es. T h e lu minesc enc e lev el is mea su red o n th e lig h t inc id enc e su rfa c e. T h a nk s to th e u se o f mo d u la ted lig h t, th e d ev ic es a re insensitiv e to a mb ient lig h t. T h ere is, h o w ev er, a n u p p er limit fo r th e intensity o f a ny ex terna l lig h t w h ic h is referred to a s th e a mb ient lig h t limit. It is sp ec ified fo r su nlig h t (u nmo d u la ted lig h t) a nd h a lo g en lig h t (lig h t mo d u la ted a t tw ic e th e freq u enc y o f th e elec tric ity su p p ly ). R elia b le o p era tio n is no t p o ssib le a b o v e th e relev a nt a mb ient lig h t limit.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/77

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
I Integration
Sensors and PLCs are growing together Thanks to intelligent linking to the PLC, IQ -Sense can now be used to implement significantly more flexibility and reliability of the sensors. The uniform exchange of data presents a great number of advantages for plant construction as well as for its operation. For example, the new IntelliTeach function permits machine and plant constructors to achieve fast commissioning, since all settings for the IQ -Sense devices can be made using the PLC. Values set once on a sensor can be transmitted to other sensors without problem. Sensors can be exchanged during operation without any extra work since the PLC automatically reestablishes all sensor settings. Furthermore, IQ -Sense permits channel-specific system diagnostics. Wire break, short-circuit, maladjustment or module/ sensor failure are automatically signaled, and parameterization errors are avoided. It is therefore possible to reduce downtimes and to increase plant availability.

I B enefits
Configuration with STEP 7 Communication between sensor and SIM ATIC PLC over a lowcost two-core cable Sensor parameterization through the control (IntelliTeach) System diagnostics down to a single sensor reduces downtimes Replacement of sensors during operation without re-parameterization
C onnectab le p roximity sw itches Op to K 80 Retroreflective sensor Retroreflective sensor with background suppression Diffuse sensor Op to C 40 Retroreflective sensor Diffuse sensor to E T 200S via 4 I Q -S ense modu le to S 7-300/ E T 200M via 8 x I Q -S ense modu le

W in C C v is u a liz a tio n

In d u s tria l Eth e rn e t

En g in e e rin g STEP 7

S7-300/ET 200M

PROCESS FIELD BUS

P R O F IB U S D P ET 200S

P ro x im ity s w itc h e s w ith IQ -Se n s e 1 ... 4 O p to 1 ... 8 O p to o r So n a r

Integration of IQ -Sense into the automation environment

2/78

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
SIMATIC PXO100

S IM A T IC P X O 1 0 0

2
D esign Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 1.5 cm to 1.8 cm 5 cm to 11 cm 12 cm to 15 cm 20 cm to 30 cm 40 cm to 50 cm 60 cm to 70 cm 1 m to 1.5 m 2 m to 3 m 4 m to 6 m 12 m to 15 m 20 m to 50 m Output pnp npn Relay Analog D irect communication with the PL C Operating voltage 24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC W iring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Special features Timer function Surplus light Transparent objects Metal enclosure Illuminant Red light Infrared light Laser light, red Incandescent light V ersion for hazardous area Z one 2/22 See page 2/92 2/92 2/87 2/87 2/88 2/88 2/88
D 4 M 5 M 12

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Siemens FS 10 2008

2/79

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
SIMATIC PXO200

SIMATIC PXO200

2
Design Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 1.5 cm to 1.8 cm 5 cm to 11 cm 12 cm to 15 cm 20 cm to 30 cm 40 cm to 50 cm 60 cm to 70 cm 1 m to 1.5 m 2 m to 3 m 4 m to 6 m 12 m to 15 m 20 m to 50 m Output pnp npn Relay Analog Direct communication with the PLC Operating voltage 24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Special features Timer function Surplus light Transparent objects Metal enclosure Illuminant Red light Infrared light Laser light, red Incandescent light Version for hazardous area Zone 2/22 See page 2/90 2/90 2/90 2/92 2/93
M18 S M18 L 18

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/80

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
SIMATIC PXO300

SIMATIC PXO3 00

PXO3 7 0

2
Design Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Color sensor Contrast sensor Sensing range 1.5 cm to 1.8 cm 5 cm to 11 cm 12 cm to 15 cm 20 cm to 30 cm 40 cm to 50 cm 60 cm to 70 cm 1 m to 1.5 m 2 m to 3 m 4 m to 6 m Output pnp npn Relay Analog Direct communication with the PLC Operating voltage 24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Special features Timer function Surplus light Transparent objects Metal enclosure Illuminant Red light Infrared light Laser light, red Incandescent light Version for hazardous area Zone 2/22 See page 2/95 2/95 2/96 2/96 2/97 2/97 2/98 2/98 2/99
K 21 K 21R K 20 L20 C20

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/81

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
SIMATIC PXO400

SIMATIC PXO400

Design Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor For plastic fiber-optic conductors Color sensor Contrast sensor Sensing range Depending on fiber-optic conductor 1.5 cm to 1.8 cm 5 cm to 11 cm 12 cm to 15 cm 20 cm to 30 cm 40 cm to 50 cm 60 cm to 70 cm 1 m to 1.5 m 2 m to 3 m 4 m to 6 m 12 m to 15 m 20 m to 50 m Output pnp npn Relay Analog Direct communication with the PLC Operating voltage 24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Special features Timer function Surplus light Transparent objects Metal enclosure Illuminant Red light Infrared light Laser light, red See page

K31

K30

2/100

2/102

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/82

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
SIMATIC PXO500

SIMATIC PXO500

Design Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Color sensor Contrast sensor Sensing range 1.5 cm to 1.8 cm 1.2 cm to 3.2 cm 5 cm to 11 cm 12 cm to 15 cm 20 cm to 30 cm 40 cm to 50 cm 60 cm to 70 cm 1 m to 1.5 m 2 m to 3 m 4 m to 6 m 12 m to 15 m 20 m to 50 m Output pnp npn Relay Analog Direct communication with the PLC Operating voltage 24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Special features Timer function Surplus light Transparent objects Metal enclosure Illuminant Red light Infrared light Laser light, red Incandescent light See page ET 200S (via IQ-Sense)

C40

L50

L50H F

L50H F a d v a n ce d

C50


ET 200S (via IQ-Sense)

3x


2/104

2/106

2/108

2/108

2/110

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Siemens FS 10 2008

2/83

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
SIMATIC PXO600

SIMATIC PXO6 00

PXO6 50

Design Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Color sensor Contrast sensor Sensing range 1.2 cm to 3.2 cm 5 cm to 11 cm 12 cm to 15 cm 20 cm to 30 cm 40 cm to 50 cm 60 cm to 75 cm 1 m to 1.5 m 2 m to 3 m 4 m to 6 m 12 m to 15 m 20 m to 50 m Output pnp npn Relay Analog Direct communication with the PLC Operating voltage 24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Special features Timer function Surplus light Transparent objects Metal enclosure Illuminant Red light Infrared light Laser light, red Incandescent light Version for hazardous area Zone 2/22 See page ET 200S (via IQ-Sense) ET 200S (via IQ-Sense)

K80

L80HF

L9 0L


ET 200S (via IQ-Sense)

2/115 2/117

2/111

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/84

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Introduction
SIMATIC PXO800

SIMATIC PXO830

SIMATIC PXO840

Design Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor For plastic fiber-optic conductors Color sensor Contrast sensor Sensing range Depending on fiber-optic conductor 1.5 cm to 1.8 cm 1.2 cm to 3.2 cm 5 cm to 11 cm 12 cm to 15 cm 20 cm to 30 cm 40 cm to 50 cm 60 cm to 75 cm 1 m to 1.5 m Output pnp npn Relay Analog Direct communication with the PLC Operating voltage 24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals Special features Timer function Surplus light Transparent objects Metal enclosure Illuminant Red light Infrared light Laser light, red Incandescent light Version for hazardous area Zone 2/22 See page

G L

LV 70

2/119

2/121

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Siemens FS 10 2008

2/85

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO100
D4 form

I Overview
Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 25 cm (not adjustable) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Thru-beam sensor

2
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Reliable detection Surplus light underrange Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type cm mm V mA mA H z ms nm 5 (not adjustable) 100 100 (white) 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 10 100 250 2.5 880 (IR) 25 (not adjustable) 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver) 250 2.5 880 (IR)

Y ellow LED Y ellow LED flashing Stainless steel IP67 C 0 ... + 55 %/K 0.3 3RG 70 40...00

3RG 70 42...00

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Diffuse sensor Sensing range cm 5 Illuminant nm 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PU R, 3 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 3-pole, type A Thru-beam sensor 25 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PU R, 3 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 3-pole, type A pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON Emitter pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON Emitter 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3R G 70 400AB00 3R G 70 400G B00 3R G 70 407AB00 3R G 70 407G B00 3R G 70 420AB00 3R G 70 420G B00 3R G 70 420BG 00 3R G 70 427AB00 3R G 70 427G B00 3R G 70 427BG 00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

I Dimensions
3RG 70 4.0..00
4

3RG 70 4.7..00
4

2 6 ,5 35

2 6 ,5 28
LE D

LE D

2/86

Siemens FS 10 2008

N S D 00803

N S D 00802

45

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO100
M5 form

I Overview
Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 25 cm (not adjustable) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Thru-beam sensor

2
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Reliable detection Surplus light underrange Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm 5 (not adjustable) 100 100 (white) 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 10 100 250 2.5 880 (IR) 25 (not adjustable) 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver) 250 2,5 880 (IR)

Yellow LED Yellow LED flashing Brass, nickel-plated IP67 C 0 ... +55 %/K 0,3 3RG70 30...00

3RG70 32...00

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Diffuse sensor Sensing range cm 5 Illuminant nm 880 (IR) Wiring Switching output pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON Emitter M8 connector, 3-pole, type A pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON Emitter Ckt. diag. No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 Order No. 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 3-pole, type A Thru-beam sensor 25 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2

3RG70 300AB00 3RG70 300GB00 3RG70 307AB00 3RG70 307GB00 3RG70 320AB00 3RG70 320GB00 3RG70 320BG00 3RG70 327AB00 3RG70 327GB00 3RG70 327BG00

I Dimensions
3RG70 3.0..00
M 5x 0,5 SW 7 26,5 30 35

3RG70 3.7..00
M 5x 0,5 SW 7

26,5 30
LED
NSD00805

LED
NSD00804

45

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/87

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO100
M12 form

I Overview
Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M12 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 30 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 1.5 m Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 4 m Enabling input for test purposes Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn

I Technical specifications
Operating mode

Diffuse sensor

Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

30 (adjustable) 200 200 (white) 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 15 200 1000 0.5 660 (red)

150 Reflector type D 84 15 1000 0.5 660 (red, polarized)

400 15 / 15 (emitter / receiver) 1000 0.5 660 (red

Yellow LED Green LED Brass, nickel-plated IP67 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG71 20...00

3RG71 21...00

3RG71 22...00

2/88

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO100
M12 form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Diffuse sensor Sensing range cm 30 (adjustable via potentiometer) Illuminant nm 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M12 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Retroreflective sensor 150 660 (red, polarized) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M12 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Thru-beam sensor 400 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter M12 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 7 13 12 13 12 7 3RG71 200AB00 3RG71 200AA00 3RG71 200GB00 3RG71 200GA00 3RG71 203AB00 3RG71 203AA00 3RG71 203GB00 3RG71 203GA00 3RG71 210AB00 3RG71 210AA00 3RG71 210GB00 3RG71 210GA00 3RG71 213AB00 3RG71 213AA00 3RG71 213GB00 3RG71 213GA00 3RG71 220AB00 3RG71 220AA00 3RG71 220GB00 3RG71 220GA00 3RG71 220BG00 3RG71 223AB00 3RG71 223AA00 3RG71 223GB00 3RG71 223GA00 3RG71 223BG00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

I Dimensions
3RG71 200..00
M 1 2x1 4

3RG71 203..00
M 1 2x1 4

3RG71 210..00 and 3RG71 220..00


M 1 2x1

3RG71 213..00 and 3RG71 223..00


M 12x1

SW 1 7 31 ,5

SW 1 7 44

P o t. LED
NSD0 00806

P o t. LED

SW 1 7

60

50

60

LE D

LED
NSD00808
N S D 00809

NSD0 00807

S W 17 44

50

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/89

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO200
M18 S form

I Overview
Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M12 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 60 or 80 cm (adjustable with potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Scanning angle 3 m Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Scanning angle 6 m Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) LEDs Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

cm mm V mA Hz ms nm

80 (adjustable) 60 (adjustable) 200 200 (white) 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 150 700 0.5 660 (red)

300 Reflector type D84

600

660 (red, polarized)

660 (red)

Yellow LED Green LED Brass, nickel-plated IP67 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG76 40...00 3RG76 50...00

3RG76 41...00, 3RG76 51...00

3RG76 42...00, 3RG76 52...00

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range cm Illuminant nm 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function 12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 3RG76 400AB00 3RG76 400AA00 3RG76 400CC00 3RG76 400CD00 3RG76 403AB00 3RG76 403AA00 3RG76 403CC00 3RG76 403CD00 3RG76 410AB00 3RG76 410AA00 3RG76 410CC00 3RG76 410CD00 3RG76 413AB00 3RG76 413AA00 3RG76 413CC00 3RG76 413CD00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

Straight sensor
Diffuse sensor 80 (adjustable via potentiometer)

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

Retroreflective sensor

300

660 (red, polarized)

2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

2/90

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO200
M18 S form
O p era ting mo d e Sensing ra ng e cm Illu mina nt nm 660 (red ) 2 m c a b le, P U R , 3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2 p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n E mitter p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n E mitter 12 12 5 6 9 12 13 5 6 9 12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 12 12 5 6 9 12 13 5 6 9 3R G 76 420A B 00 3R G 76 420A A 00 3R G 76 420C C 00 3R G 76 420C D 00 3R G 76 420B G 00 3R G 76 423A B 00 3R G 76 423A A 00 3R G 76 423C C 00 3R G 76 423C D 00 3R G 76 423B G 00 3R G 76 500A B 00 3R G 76 500A A 00 3R G 76 500C C 00 3R G 76 500C D 00 3R G 76 503A B 00 3R G 76 503A A 00 3R G 76 503C C 00 3R G 76 503C D 00 3R G 76 510A B 00 3R G 76 510A A 00 3R G 76 510C C 00 3R G 76 510C D 00 3R G 76 513A B 00 3R G 76 513A A 00 3R G 76 513C C 00 3R G 76 513C D 00 3R G 76 520A B 00 3R G 76 520A A 00 3R G 76 520C C 00 3R G 76 520C D 00 3R G 76 520B G 00 3R G 76 523A B 00 3R G 76 523A A 00 3R G 76 523C C 00 3R G 76 523C D 00 3R G 76 523B G 00 W iring Sw itc h ing o u tp u t C k t. d ia g . N o. O rd er N o .

Strai g h t sen sor


T h ru -b ea m senso r 600

2 0.34 mm

M 12 p lu g , 4-p o le, ty p e F

A ngl ed sen sor


D iffu se senso r 60 (a d ju sta b le v ia p o tentio meter) 660 (red ) 2 m c a b le, P U R , 3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2 p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n E mitter p np , lig h t-O N p np , d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd d a rk -O N p np , lig h t-O N a nd su rp lu s lig h t fu nc tio n E mitter

M 12 p lu g , 4-p o le, ty p e F

R etro reflec tiv e senso r

300

660 (red , p o la riz ed )

2 m c a b le, P U R , 3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2

M 12 p lu g , 4-p o le, ty p e F

T h ru -b ea m senso r

600

660 (red )

2 m c a b le, P U R , 3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2

2 0.34 mm2 M 12 p lu g , 4-p o le, ty p e F

D imensio na l d ra w ing s see M 18.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/ 91

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO200
M18 form

I O verview
Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67 , connection using cable or M12 connector Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 1 to 12 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn

I Technical sp ecifications
Operating mode Diffu se sensor w ith b ackgrou nd su p p ression

2
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operational current Ie Switching freq uency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection A mbient temperature Temperature coefficient Type cm mm V mA mA H z ms nm 1 to12 (adjustable) 50 50 (white) 10 ... 36 (max . 20 % residual ripple) 25 200 500 1 660 (red)

Y ellow L ED G reen L ED B rass, nickel-plated IP67 C 25 ... + 55 % /K 0.3 3RG 7 1 34 ...00

I Selection and O rdering data


Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm 1 ... 12 (adjustable via potentiometer) Illuminant nm 660 (red) Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 Order No. 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M12 plug, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON

3RG71 340AB00 3RG71 340AA00 3RG71 340GB00 3RG71 340GA00 3RG71 343AB00 3RG71 343AA00 3RG71 343GB00 3RG71 343GA00

I Dimensions
M18 type
3RG 7 1 3. 0..00
M 18x1 4

M18S type
3RG 7 1 3. 3..00
M 18x1

3RG 7 6 4.-...00
M 18 1 16 ,6
N S D 0 _ 0 129 9

3RG 7 6 5.-...00
M 18 1 16 ,6
N S D 0 _ 0 1288

S W 24 29

4 S W 24 29

4 S W 24 m in . 34

P o t. LE D G N YE M 12 1 16 ,3
13 27 ,9

N S D 0 0 0 810

P o t. LE D G N YE M 12 1 16 ,3 13 27 ,9

65 7 2,1

65

P o t. LE D

P o t. L E D 4x

4 S W 24 m in . 34

50

6 3,5

N S D 0 0 0 811

2/92

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO200
L18 form

I Overview
Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M12 connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp Supplied with focusing and adjustment aid, without fixing materials

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Laser thru-beam sensor

Sensing range Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

m V mA mA Hz ms nm

50 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 15 (receiver), 10 (emitter) 200 6000 < 0.083 660 (red laser light)

Yellow LED Red LED Green LED Brass, nickel-plated IP65 C 10 ... +60 %/K 0.1 3RG71 35...00, 3RG71 75...00

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/93

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO200
L18 form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range m Illuminant nm 660 (red) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 M12 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 5 9 5 9 3RG71 350CC00 3RG71 350BE 00 3RG71 353CC00 3RG71 353BE 00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

Straight sensor
Laser thrubeam sensor 50 (adjustable via potentiometer)

2
Straight sensor
Laser thrubeam sensor 50 (adjustable via potentiometer) 660 (red)

pnp, light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter

3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

pnp, light-ON and 6 surplus light function pnp, light-ON and 6 surplus light function

3RG71 350CD00 3RG71 353CD00

Angled sensor
Laser thrubeam sensor 50 (adjustable via potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 M12 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter pnp, light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 5 9 5 9 3RG71 750CC00 3RG71 750BE 00 3RG71 753CC00 3RG71 753BE 00

Angled sensor
Laser thrubeam sensor 50 (adjustable via potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 M12 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, light-ON and 6 surplus light function pnp, light-ON and 6 surplus light function 3RG71 750CD00 3RG71 753CD00

I Dimensions
Straight sensor
3RG71 350C.00
M 18x1 5

3RG71 350BE00
M 18x1

3RG71 353C.00
M 18x1 4

3RG71 353BE00
M 18x1 5

37

48

SW 24

48

37

SW 24

SW 24

Pot. Pot. LED


NSD0 00853 NSD00854

LED
NSD0 00858 NSD00859

M 12x1

M 12x1

Angled sensor
3RG71 750C.00
27,7 SW 24 20 SW 24

3RG71 750BE00
28,7 5

3RG71 753C.00
27,7 SW 24 20 SW 24

SW 24

64

75

75

64

3RG71 753BE00
28,7 5

M 18x1 SW 24

M 18x1

75

75

M 18x1

75

75

75

75

M 18x1

M 18x1

NSD00857

NSD00855

NSD0 00856

NSD00860

M 12x1

M 12x1

NSD0 00861

M 12x1

2/94

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00862

Pot. LED

Pot. LED

M 18x1

SW 24

48

48

48

48

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO300
K21, K21R forms

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP68, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 50 cm Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 3 m Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material and without reflector

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Retroreflective sensor

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

50 100 100 (white 90 %) 10 ... 30 28 150 700 0.5 660 (red)

300 Reflector type R 60 33 25 30

Yellow LED Red LED ABS/PMMA IP68 C 5 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG74 00...00

3RG74 20...00

3RG74 01...00

3RG74 21...00

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range cm 50 Illuminant nm 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, 3-pole, type A pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Retroreflective sensor 300 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, 3-pole, type A pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3RG74 000AB00 3RG74 000AA00 3RG74 000GB00 3RG74 000GA00 3RG74 007AB00 3RG74 007AA00 3RG74 007GB00 3RG74 007GA00 3RG74 010AB00 3RG74 010AA00 3RG74 010GB00 3RG74 010GA00 3RG74 017AB00 3RG74 017AA00 3RG74 017GB00 3RG74 017GA00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

Design K21
Diffuse sensor

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/95

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO300
K21, K21R forms
Operating mode Sensing range cm 50 Illuminant nm 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, 3-pole, type A pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Retroreflective sensor 300 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, 3-pole, type A pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3RG74 200AB00 3RG74 200AA00 3RG74 200GB00 3RG74 200GA00 3RG74 207AB00 3RG74 207AA00 3RG74 207GB00 3RG74 207GA00 3RG74 210AB00 3RG74 210AA00 3RG74 210GB00 3RG74 210GA00 3RG74 217AB00 3RG74 217AA00 3RG74 217GB00 3RG74 217GA00 3RX 7 3080AA00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

Design K21R
Diffuse sensor

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form K21, K21R

I Dimensions
3RG74 0.0....

12
NSD0_01091

20 3

3RG74 0.7.... 12
NSD0_01092

20 3

33 31 24

3,3

39,6 31 24

3,3

12

2,6

2,6 M 8x1

3RG74 2.0....

3RG74 2.7....

29,9 12
NSD0_01093

29,9 12
NSD0_01094

20 3

20 3

M 18x1

39,5 31 24

3,3

3,3

46 44

11

2,6

2,6

M 8x1
12 M 18x1

2/96

Siemens FS 10 2008

M 18x1

24

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO300
K20 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 2.5 10 cm (adjustable using teach-in) Retro-reflective sensors for transparent objects (adjustable with teach-in) Sensing range 50 cm Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Anti-interference function Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material and without reflector

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor for transparent obj ects

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

2.5 ... 10 (adjustable) 100 100 (gray 18 %) 10 ... 30 25 100 1000 0.5 660 (red)

5 ... 50 (adjustable) Reflector type R 60

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C 20 ... +60 %/K 0.3 3RG74 04...00

3RG74 01...52

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing Illumirange nant cm nm Diffuse sensor 2,5 ... 10 660 (red) with back(adjustable via ground sup"teach-in") pression Operating mode Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. pnp 14 npn 14 pnp 14 npn 14 pnp 14 npn 14 pnp 14 npn 14 Order No. Light-ON or dark-ON 2 m cable, PUR, 2 4 0.14 mm M8 plug, Light-ON or dark-ON 4-pole, type B Light-ON or dark-ON 2 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 M8 plug, Light-ON or dark-ON 4-pole, type B

3RG74 040CH 00 3RG74 040H H 00 3RG74 047CH 00 3RG74 047H H 00 3RG74 010CH 52 3RG74 010H H 52 3RG74 017CH 52 3RG74 017H H 52 3RX7 3080AA00

Retroreflective 5 ... 50 660 (red) sensor (adjustable via for transpar"teach-in") ent objects

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form K20

I Dimensions
3RG74 0.0....
12 3.2
NSD00826

3RG74 0.7....
12 3.2
NSD00827

4.2

24

32

24 4

4.2

2.6 10.7 20

M 8x1

2.6 10.7 20

3.8

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/97

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO300
L20 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67 Connection via cable or M8 connector Visible laser light (red) Laser protection class 2 as per EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 3 to 11 cm (adjustable via "teach-in") Diffuse sensor Sensing range 5 to 300 cm (sensitivity adjustable via "teachin") Solid-state output pnp Supplied without mounting accessories and without reflector

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor

Sensing range Standard target/reflector Light spot diameter Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Type

cm mm mm V mA mA kHz nm

3 ... 11 (adjustable) Gray 18 % 1 mm at 300 mm distance 10 ... 30 30 100 1 650 (red laser light)

5 ... 300 (adjustable) Reflector type RL 50 0.7 mm at 100 mm distance 25 4

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C 20 ... +60 3RG74 067CH61

3RG74 077CH00

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Sensing range cm 3 ... 11 (adjustable via "teach-in") Illuminant nm 650 (laser red) Wiring Switching output pnp Ckt. diag. No. 14 A Order No. M8 plug, Light-ON or 4-pole, type B dark-ON

3RG74 067CH61

5 ... 300 (adjustable via "teach-in")

650 (laser red)

M8 plug, Light-ON or 4-pole, type B dark-ON

pnp

14

3RG74 077CH00

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form L20 3RX7 308-0AA00

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
3RG74 0.7CH..
12 3.2
NSD00827

32

24 4

4.2

M 8x1

2.6 10.7 20

2/98

Siemens FS 10 2008

3.8

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO300
C20 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using M8 connector Visible laser light (red) Laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Contrast sensor for color mark sensing Sensing range 4 to 15 cm (adjustable using teach-in) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp Supplied without mounting area and without reflector

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Contrast sensor

Sensing range

Light spot diameter


Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Output current IA Switching frequency Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching state output Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Type

cm 4 ... 15 (adjustable via teach-in) mm 0.7 in focus V mA mA Hz nm 10 ... 30 25 100 4000 650 (red) Yellow LED Green LED

Molded plastic (ABS)


IP67 C 20 ... +60 3RG74 087CH00

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Contrast sensor Sensing range cm 4 ... 15 (adjustable via "teach-in") Illuminant nm 650 (red) M8 plug, 4-pole, type B pnp 14 A 3RG74 087CH00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form C20 3RX7 308-0AA00

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
3RG74 087CH00
12 3.2
NSD00827

32

24 4

4.2

M 8x1

2.6 10.7 20

3.8

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/99

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO400
K31 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 60 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 3 to 15 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material

Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 2 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Displays Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type Operating mode

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

60 (adjustable) 200 200 (white) 10 ... 30 (max. 20% residual ripple) 15 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR)

3 ... 15 (adjustable) 100 100 (white) 25 500 1 660 (red)

200 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84 15 1000 0.5 660 (red, polarized)

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) IP65 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG70 10... Thru-beam sensor

3RG70 14...

3RG70 11... Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Displays Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

600 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 15 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR)

Depending on type of optical fiber 100 100 (white)

660 (red)

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) IP65 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG70 12...

3RG70 13...

2/100

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO400
K31 form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Diffuse sensor Sensing range cm 60 (adjustable via potentiometer) Illuminant nm 880 (IR) Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Order No. 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON

M8 connector, 3-pole, type A

Diffuse sensor with background suppression

3 ... 15 (adjustable via potentiometer)

660 (red)

2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2

M8 connector, 3-pole, type A

Retroreflective sensor

200 (adjustable via potentiometer)

660 (red, polarized)

2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2

M8 connector, 3-pole, type A

Thru-beam sensor

600 (adjustable via potentiometer)

880 (IR)

2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2

M8 connector, 3-pole, type A

Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Depends on FO conductor

660 (red)

2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2

M8 connector, 3-pole, type A

3RG70 100AB01 3RG70 100AA01 3RG70 100GB00 3RG70 100GA00 3RG70 107AB01 3RG70 107AA01 3RG70 107GB00 3RG70 107GA00 3RG70 140AB00 3RG70 140AA00 3RG70 140GB00 3RG70 140GA00 3RG70 147AB00 3RG70 147AA00 3RG70 147GB00 3RG70 147GA00 3RG70 110AB01 3RG70 110AA01 3RG70 110GB00 3RG70 110GA00 3RG70 117AB01 3RG70 117AA01 3RG70 117GB00 3RG70 117GA00 3RG70 120AB01 3RG70 120AA01 3RG70 120GB00 3RG70 120GA00 3RG70 120BG01 3RG70 127AB01 3RG70 127AA01 3RG70 127GB00 3RG70 127GA00 3RG70 127BG01 3RG70 130AB00 3RG70 130AA00 3RG70 130GB00 3RG70 130GA00 3RG70 137AB00 3RG70 137AA00 3RG70 137GB00 3RG70 137GA00 3RX7 910

Accessories
Mounting bracket for forms K30, K31

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
3RG70 100...., 3RG70 120...., 3RG70 140....
F or M 4 14 21 30 21 4,5

3RG70 110....
F or M 4 14 21 30 21 5 4,5

3RG70 130....
F or M 4 21 30 21 4,5 4,5

NSD00829

21 30

NSD00832

NSD00828

21 30

20

20

4,5

3RG70 107...., 3RG70 127...., 3RG70 147....


F or M 4 14 21 30 21 4,5

4,5

15

21

3RG70 117....
F or M 4 14 21 30 21 5 4,5

3RG70 137....
F or M 4
21

30 21

4,5 4,5

NSD00833

NSD00831

21 30

NSD00830

20

21 30

20

20

4,5

15

21

4,5

15

21

4,5

15

21

21 30

4,5

15

21

20

15

21

21 30

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/101

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO400
K30 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 1.2 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 4 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 12 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type Operating mode

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

120 (adjustable) 200 200 (white) 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 15 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR)

400 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84 15

660 (red, polarized)

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) IP67 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG70 10...00 Thru-beam sensor

3RG70 11...00 Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

1200 (adjustable) 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 15 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR)

Depending on type of optical fiber 100 100 (white)

660 (red)

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) IP67 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG70 12...00

3RG70 13...00

2/102

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO400
K30 form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range cm Diffuse sensor Illuminant nm 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 2 pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 2 pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 pnp 3 npn 3 pnp 4 npn 4 3RG70 100CC00 3RG70 100HC00 3RG70 100CD00 3RG70 100HD00 3RG70 107CC00 3RG70 107HC00 3RG70 107CD00 3RG70 107HD00 3RG70 110CC00 3RG70 110HC00 3RG70 110CD00 3RG70 110HD00 3RG70 117CC00 3RG70 117HC00 3RG70 117CD00 3RG70 117HD00 3RG70 120CC00 3RG70 120HC00 3RG70 120CD00 3RG70 120HD00 3RG70 120BE00 3RG70 127CC00 3RG70 127HC00 3RG70 127CD00 3RG70 127HD00 3RG70 127BE00 3RG70 130CC00 3RG70 130HC00 3RG70 130CD00 3RG70 130HD00 3RG70 137CC00 3RG70 137HC00 3RG70 137CD00 3RG70 137HD00 3RX7 910 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

120 880 (IR) (adjustable via potentiometer)

M8 plug, Light-ON and dark4-pole, type B ON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function Retroreflective sensor 400 (adjustable via potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function

M8 plug, Light-ON and dark4-pole, type B ON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function Thru-beam sensor 1200 880 (IR) (adjustable via potentiometer) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function Emitter

3 0.14 mm2

M8 plug, Light-ON and dark4-pole, type B ON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function Emitter Sensor for plastic optical fibers Depends on 660 FO conductor (red) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function

M8 plug, Light-ON and dark4-pole, type B ON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function

Accessories
Mounting bracket for forms K30, K31

I Dimensions
3RG70 100..00, 3RG70 120..00
For M 4
14 21

3RG70 110..00
For M 4
21 14

3RG70 130..00
30 21 5 4,5 For M 4
21

30 21

4,5

30 21

4,5 4,5

NSD00828

NSD00829

NSD00832

21 30

21 30

20

20

20

4,5

4,5

3RG70 107..00, 3RG70 127..00


For M 4
14 21

3RG70 117..00
For M 4
21 14

3RG70 137..00
30 21 5 4,5 For M 4
21

30 21

4,5

30 21

4,5 4,5

NSD00830

NSD00831

NSD00833

21 30

21 30

20

20

20

4,5

4,5

4,5

15

21

15

21

15

21

21 30

4,5

15

21

15

21

15

21

21 30

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/103

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO500
C40 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, wired with M12 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 70 cm (adjustable via "teach-in") Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 5 to 25 cm (adjustable via "teach-in") Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range 1 m (adjustable via "teach-in") Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Solid-state output pnp or npn Supplied with mounting bracket, without reflector External "teach-in"

Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable via "teach-in")

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type Operating mode

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

70 (adjustable) 200 200 (wei ) 10 ... 30 35 200 1000 0.5 660 (rot)

5 ... 25 (adjustable) 100 100 (grau) 25 250 200 2.5

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP) IP67 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.1 3RG72 40...00 Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

3RG72 44...00 Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

600 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84 10 ... 30 35 200 1000 0.5 660 (red, polarized)

100 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84

Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C 25 ... +55 %/K 0.1 3RG72 41...00

3RG72 41...52

2/104

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO500
C40 form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range cm Diffuse sensor 70 (adjustable via "teach-in") 5 ... 25 (adjustable via "teach-in") 600 (adjustable via "teach-in") 100 (adjustable via "teach-in") Illuminant Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Order No. nm 660 (red) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, light-ON or dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON pnp, light-ON or dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON pnp, light-ON or dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON pnp, light-ON or dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON IQ -Sense 3RG72 403CH00 3RG72 403HH00 3RG72 443CH00 3RG72 443HH00 3RG72 413CH00 3RG72 413HH00 3RG72 413CH52 3RG72 413HH52

Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects

660 (red)

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

660 (red, polarized)

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

660 (red, polarized)

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

Communication-capable proximity switches with C40 I Q -Sense design


Diffuse sensor 70 660 (red) for connection to the 4 IQ -Sense sensor module for connection to the 4 IQ -Sense sensor module 9 3SF 72 403JQ 00

Retroreflective sensor

600

660 (red)

IQ -Sense

3SF 72 413JQ 00

I Dimensions
3RG72 4.3....
LED
NSD0_ 01184a

40 46 55

5,3x7,3 30 40 M 12x1 40

69

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/105

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO500
L50 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection via cable or M12 connector Visible laser light (red) Laser protection class 2 as per EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 3 to 15 cm (adjustable via potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 20 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Solid-state output pnp Analog output Supplied without mounting accessories

Diffuse sensor with analog output Sensing range 4.5 to 8.5 cm (adjustable via potentiometer)

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Laser diffuse sensor

Sensing range Standard target/reflector Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) LEDs Switching status Surplus light Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type Operating mode

cm mm V mA mA Hz ms nm

3 ... 15 (adjustable) 100 100 (white) 10 ... 30 (max. 10% residual ripple) 50 200 2500 < 0.2 650 (red laser light)

2000 (adjustable) Reflector type RL 50

Yellow LED Red LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C 20 ... +45 %/K 0.1 3RG70 56...00 Laser diffuse sensor with analog output

3RG70 57...00

Sensing range Resolution Linearity Measuring spot diameter (at 65 mm distance) Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Analog output Output current, max. Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) LEDs Surplus light Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient

mm m ms mm V mA V mA Hz ms nm

45 ... 85 (adjustable) 80 < 1 % of measuring range (40 mm) < 0.8 18 ... 28 (max. 10% residual ripple) 35 0 ... 10 3 500 1 650

20

50 10

Red LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C 0 ... +45 m/K 18 3RG70 56.CM00

3RG70 56.CM03

2/106

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO500
L50 form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range/ res- Illuminant olution nm Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression 3 ... 15 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) 650 (red laser light) 2 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 Light-ON and dark- pnp 5 ON (antivalent) npn 5 Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 6 npn 6 3RG70 560CC00 3RG70 560HC00 3RG70 560CD00 3RG70 560HD00 3RG70 563CC00 3RG70 563HC00 3RG70 563CD00 3RG70 563HD00 3RG70 570CC00 3RG70 570HC00 3RG70 570CD00 3RG70 570HD00 3RG70 573CC00 3RG70 573HC00 3RG70 573CD00 3RG70 573HD00 3RG70 561CM00 3RG70 561CM03 3RG70 563CM00 3RG70 563CM03 3RX7 302 Wiring Switching output/ analog output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

Light-ON and dark- pnp 5 ON (antivalent) npn 5 Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 6 npn 6

Laser diffuse sensor

2000 cm (adjustable via potentiometer)

650 (red laser light)

2 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2

Light-ON and dark- pnp 5 ON (antivalent) npn 5 Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 6 npn 6

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

Light-ON and dark- pnp 5 ON (antivalent) npn 5 Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 6 npn 6 15 15 15 15

Laser diffuse sensor with analog output

45 ... 85 mm/80 m 650 (red laser light) 45 ... 85 mm/20 m 45 ... 85 mm/80 m 45 ... 85 mm/20 m

6 m cable, PVC, 4 0.34 mm2, shielded M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

analog 0 to 10 V, rising signal analog 0 to 10 V, rising signal

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form L50

I Dimensions
3RG70 5.0..00, 3RG70 561..0.
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs

3RG70 5.3..0.
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs

50

46 44

50
NSD0 00864

NSD0 00863

46 44

16

4,3 40 44

16

M 12x1

M 12x1 40 44

I Characteristic curves
3RG70 56.CM0.
NSD00865

Me as u ring rang e

10 V

0V

45 mm

85 mm

4,3

27,5

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/107

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO500
L50 HF, L50HF advanced type of construction

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection with M12 connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with analog output, parameterizable using teachin buttons Resolution < 0.1 % of full-scale value Two digital channels, can be set as 2 switching outputs or 1 switching output and one trigger input Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronic inputs or outputs, pnp Analog output 4 to 20 mA (scaling can be set) Supplied without mounting material

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with analog output

Sensing range Resolution Linearity Light spot diameter (at end of sensing range) Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Analog output Output current per switching output Recommended load Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) LEDs Ready for operation Status display Switching state, input/output Status display, trigger input Object valid Timer function active Measured value centering active Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Wiring Type

mm %/MBE %/MBE mm V mA mA mA W Hz ms nm

30 ... 100 < 0.1 < 0.25 1.5 x 3.25 18 ... 30 40 4 ... 20 100 500 1000 <1 650

80 ... 300

2 x 4.5

Green LED Red LED LED yellow ( 2 x ) Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C -10 ... +60 %/K 0.02 M12 plug, 8-pole, Type O 3RG70 563NQ00

3RG70 563NQ61

2/108

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO500
L50 HF, L50HF advanced type of construction

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range mm Laser diffuse sensor with analog output 30 ... 100 Illuminant Wiring Analog output mA M12 plug, 8pole, Type O 4 ... 20 pnp 20 A 3RG70 563N Q00 Ckt. diag. No. Order No. nm 650 (red laser light)

2
Operating mode L50 HF Laser diffuse sensor with analog output 80 ... 300 650 (red laser light) M12 plug, 8pole, Type O 4 ... 20 pnp 20 A 3RG70 563N Q61

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form L50 HF Cable plug, shielded, 8 0.25 mm2 A 3RX7 302 3RX8 000-0CB81-1GF0

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
3RG70 563NQ..
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs

50
NSD0 00864

46 44

16

M 12x1

M 12x1 40 44

4,3

27,5

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/109

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO500
SIMATIC PXO560 C50

I Overview
Color sensor with three individually adjustable switch outputs 3 color ranges can be learned Long-term stable and neutral color white-light transmitter LEDs 5 tolerance levels selectable Sensing range 12 32 mm Transparent objects with reflection film detectable Trigger function via activation input External Teach-in Rated operating voltage 24 V DC 3 electronic outputs (pnp)

Supplied without mounting material and without reflector

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Color sensor Response time Pulse stretching/dropout delay Sensing range for light spot 4 mm Sensing range tolerance for light spot 4 mm Color resolution tolerance Illuminant Light spot diameter at a distance of 22 mm Ambient light limit Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature range Storage temperature range Type of connection Max. permissible lead length Weight 10 ms 50 ms 12 ... 32 mm 6 mm for mean tolerance Adjustable in 5 stages White light, pulsed 4 mm EN 60947-5-2 ABS IP67 -10 ... +55 C -20 ... +80 C M12 connector, 8-pole 5m 40 g

Operating voltage Max. residual ripple Reverse polarity protection, short-circuit protection Current consumption during no-load operation Switching outputs Max. output current Max. voltage drop at the switching output Power-up delay Switching frequency Switching status indicator CH1 ... CH3 Operating voltage indicator Tolerance level indicator Tol1 ... Tol5

12 ... 28 V DC 10 % Yes 40 mA at 24 V DC Q1 ... Q3, PNP NO contact 100 mA < 2.4 V < 300 ms 500 Hz 3 yellow LEDs Green LED 3 red LEDs

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range mm 12 32 Illuminant Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 17 A Order No.

Color sensor PX O560 with 3 switching outputs

White light, pulsed

M12 plug, 8-pole, Type O

3 x pnp

3RG70 50-3NB00

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form C50 Cable plug, shielded, 8 x 0.25 mm, 5 m Reflection film for detection of transparent objects 3RX7302 3RX8000-0CB81-1GF0 A 3RX7307-0AB00

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
3RG70 50-3NB00
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs

50
NSD0 00864

46 44

16

M 12x1

M 12x1 40 44

2/110

Siemens FS 10 2008

4,3

27,5

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
K80 form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using M12 connector or Pg 11 cable gland Versions for use in potentially explosive environments acc. to 94/9/EG (ATEX exists): Z one 2 (gases, vapors, mist) according to classification II 3G Z one 22 (dust atmosphere, non-conductive dust) according to classification II 3D Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 2 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 0.2 to 1 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector "Advanced" version 1 to 12 m Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC or 240 V AC/DC Inputs and outputs Electronics output pnp or npn programmable as light-ON or dark-ON light-ON, dark-ON (antivalent) Relay output 20 V to 320 V AC/DC Timing function (delayed pick-up or drop-out, pulse shaping) Enabling input for test purposes Supplied without mounting material

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Operating voltage range (AC/DC) No-load power, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency, max. Switching time, max. Wavelength (illuminant) Switching state/surplus light function display Enclosure material Degree of protection Approval for Ex Z ones 2/22 Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

m mm V mA V VA mA Hz ms nm

2 (adjustable) 400 400 (white) 10 ... 36 30 20 ... 265 2 200 2000 (at 240 V AC) 1000 20 0.5 20 880 (IR) LED yellow/LED green

10 ... 36 30 200 200 1000 0.5

0,2 ... 1 (adjustable) 200 200 (white) 10 ... 36 45 200 250 2 880 (IR)

Formstoff (PBTP) IP67 no C 5 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG72 00-...00, 3RG72 10-...00

no 5 ... +55 3RG72 10-6MC00

yes 5 ... +40 3RG72 00-3CC000XB4

no 5 ... +55 3RG72 04-...00, 3RG72 14-...00

Operating mode

Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range Reflector Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Operating voltage range (AC/DC) No-load power, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency, max. Switching time, max. Wavelength (illuminant) Switching state/surplus light function display Enclosure material Degree of protection Approval for Ex Z ones 2/22 Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

m mm V mA V VA mA

6/12 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84 10 ... 36 30 20 ... 265 2 200 2000 (at 240 V AC)) Hz 1000 20 ms 0.5 20 nm 660 (red, polarized) LED yellow/LED green

10 ... 36 30 200 1000 0.5

50 (adjustable) 10 ... 36 30 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR)

20 ... 320 2 2000 (at 240 V AC) 20 20

10 ... 36 200 1000 0.5

Molded plastic (PBTP) IP67 no no C 5 ... +55 5 ... +55 %/K 0.3 3RG72 01-...00, 3RG72 11-6MC00, 3RG72 01-...61, 3RG72 11-6MC61 3RG72 11-...00, 3RG72 11-...61

yes 5 ... +40

no 5 ... +55

no 5 ... +55

yes 5 ... +40

3RG72 01-3CC..- 3RG72 02-...00, 0XB4 3RG72 12-...00

3RG72 12-6MC00, 3RG72 02-3RG72 02-6FG00 0XB4, 3RG72 12-0XB4

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/111

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
K80 form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range m Illuminant nm M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 5-pole, type G Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Relay, light-ON and dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Relay, light-ON and dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Relay, light-ON and dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s) pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn Relay 11 11 10 5 5 8 8 3RG72 003CC00 3RG72 003HC00 3RG72 103DK00 3RG72 103EK00 3RG72 006CC00 3RG72 006HC00 3RG72 106DK00 3RG72 106EK00 3RG72 106MC00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

K80 form
Diffuse sensor 2 880 (IR) (adjustable via potentiometer)

Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole Pg 11, 5-pole

K80 form
Diffuse sensor with background suppression 0,2 ... 1 880 (IR) (adjustable via potentiometer) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 5-pole, type G pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn 11 11 5 5 8 8 3RG72 043CC00 3RG72 043HC00 3RG72 143DK00 3RG72 143EK00 3RG72 046CC00 3RG72 046HC00 3RG72 146DK00 3RG72 146EK00

Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole

K80 form
Retroreflective sensor 6 (adjustable via potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 5-pole, type G pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn 5 5 8 8 11 11 11 11 10 3RG72 013CC00 3RG72 013HC00 3RG72 113DK00 3RG72 113EK00 3RG72 016CC00 3RG72 016HC00 3RG72 116DK00 3RG72 116EK00 3RG72 116MC00

Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole Pg 11, 5-pole

12 (adjustable via potentiometer)

660 (red, polarized)

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, 5-pole

pnp pnp Relay

3RG72 013CC61 3RG72 016CC61

10

3RG72 116MC61

2/112

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
K80 form
Operating mode Sensing range m Illuminant nm 880 (IR) M12 plug, Light-ON and dark4-pole, type F ON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) pnp 5 npn 5 pnp 6 3RG72 023CC00 3RG72 023HC00 3RG72 123DK00 Wiring Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

K80 form
Thru-beam sensor 50 (adjustable via potentiometer)

Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole Pg 11, 5-pole

pnp 11 npn 11 pnp 11 npn 11 10

3RG72 026CC00 3RG72 026HC00 3RG72 126DK00 3RG72 126EK00 3RG72 126MC00

Thru-beam sensor Emitter

50 (adjustable via potentiometer)

880 (IR)

Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Relay, light-ON and dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s) M12 plug, Emitter DC with 4-pole, type F enabling input Pg 11, Emitter DC with 3-pole enabling input Pg 11, Emitter AC/DC with 3-pole enabling input

7 11 11

3RG72 023BG00 3RG72 026BG00 3RG72 026FG00

Operating mode

Sensing range m

Illuminant nm 880 (IR)

Wiring

Switching output

Ckt. diag. No.

Order No.

K80 ATEX form


Diffuse sensor Retroreflective sensor 2 (can be set with potentiometer) 6 (can be set with potentiometer) 12 (can be set with potentiometer) Thru-beam sensor 50 (can be set with potentiometer) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) pnp 5 3RG72 003CC00-0XB4

660 (red, polarized) 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR)

pnp 5

3RG72 013CC00-0XB4

Light-ON and darkON (antivalent)

pnp 5

3RG72 013CC61-0XB4

Light-ON and darkON (antivalent) Light-On or Dark-On and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Sender with enable input for connection to the 4IQ-Sense sensor module for connection to the 4IQ-Sense sensor module for connection to the 4IQ-Sense sensor module

pnp 5 pnp 6

3RG72 023CC00-0XB4 3RG72 123DK00-0XB4

3RG72 023BG00-0XB4

Communication-capable proximity switches with K80 IQ-Sense form


Diffuse sensor 2 880 (IR) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 4-pole, type F 9 3SF72 103JQ00

Diffuse sen0.2 ... 1 sor with background suppression Retroreflec8 tive sensor

880 (IR)

3SF72 143JQ00

660 (red, polarized)

3SF72 113JQ00

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form K80 3RX7 303

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/113

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
K80 form

I Dimensions
3RG72 ..3..00 3RG72 ..3..00-0XB4
65 Pot. + LEDs
NSD0 00846b

3RG72 ..6..00
65 Pot. + LEDs
NSD0 00848b

83 73 62

83 73 62

30
30 13,2

5
5,5

5,5 10 20 36 M 12x1 50 25

10 20 36

25 PG 11 50

2/114

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
L80 HF form

I Overview
Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, wired with M12 connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 2 as per EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with analog output, configurable using teach-in keys Resolution < 0.1 % of sensing range upper limit Two digital channels, adjustable as 2 switching outputs or 1 switching output and 1 trigger input Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Solid-state inputs or outputs pnp Analog output 4 to 20 mA (adjustable normalization) Supplied without mounting accessories

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with analog output

2
mm %/MBE %/MBE mm V mA mA mA W Hz ms nm 250 ... 750 < 0.1 < 0.25 2 x 4.5 18 ... 30 40 4 ... 20 100 500 1000 <1 650

Sensing range Resolution Linearity Light spot diameter (at end of sensing range) Operating voltage range (DC) No-load supply current I0, max. Analog output Output current per switching output Recommended load Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Ready for operation Status display Switching state, input/output Status display, trigger input Object valid Timer function active Measured value centering active Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Wiring Type

Green LED Red LED Yellow LED (2 x) Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED PBT IP67 C -10 ... +60 %/K 0.02 M12 plug, 8-pole, type O 3RG72 563NQ00

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/115

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
L80 HF form

I Selection and Ordering data


Operating mode Sensing range mm Laser diffuse sensor with analog output 250 ... 750 Illuminant Wiring Analog output mA M12 plug, 8-pole, type O 4 ... 20 pnp 20 A 3RG72 563NQ00 Ckt. diag. No. Order No. nm 650 (red laser light)

2
Operating mode L80 HF

Accessories
Mounting bracket for form L80 HF Cable plug, shielded, 8 0.25 mm2 A 3RX7 303 3RX8 000-0CB81-1GF0

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
3RG72 563NQ00
65 Pot. + LEDs
NSD0 00846b

83 73 62

30 13,2 5 5,5 10 20 36 M 12x1 50 25

2/116

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
SIMATIC PXO650 L90L

I Overview
Measuring laser sensor based on the principle of optical running-time measurement Measuring laser with IR light; laser class 1 Pilot laser for adjustment with visible red light; laser class 2 Wired via M12 4-pole or 5-pole connector Range 6 m; range with reflector 30 m Rated operating voltage 24 V DC 1 or 2 solid-state outputs pnp NO or NC contact, adjustable via "teach-in" Analog output 4 to 20 mA Timer function

I Technical specifications
Sensing range
Standard target/reflector Operating mode Light spot diameter (at end of sensing range) Reproducibility Slow Fast Operating voltage range No-load supply current Io, max. Rated operating current Ie Analog output Response time Slow Fast Wavelength (illuminant) Measuring laser Pilot laser Displays Switching status Operating voltage Operating mode Adjustment menu Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature during operation Ambient temperature during storage Temperature coefficient Type 0. 2 6m White 90%, 100 x 100 mm Distance sensor/jogging 4 x 12 mm 10 mm 15 mm 18 30 V DC 125 mA at 24 V DC 100 mA 80 ms 13 ms 905 nm, IR, invisible, class 1 650 nm, red, visible, class 2 Green LED Yellow LED Orange LED Plastic (ABS) IP67 -20 C +50 C -40 C +80 C 0.3 %/K 6GR1654-3AD20 0. 2 6m 0. 2 30 m R250 reflector, 250 x 250 mm Distance sensor/ retroreflective sensor 45 x 60 mm 5 mm 10 mm

4 20 mA 65 ms 13 ms

2 yellow LEDs 4 red LEDs

6GR1654-3CH20

6GR1654-3CH21

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/117

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO600
SIMATIC PXO650 L90L

I Selection and Ordering data


Sensing range m 0.2 6 0.2 6 0.2 30 M12 plug, 4-pole, type F M12 plug, 5-pole, type F M12 plug, 5-pole, type G 1 x light-ON or dark-ON 2 x light-ON or dark-ON 2 x light-ON or dark-ON yes yes pn p pn p pn p 12 19 19 A 6GR1654-3AD20 A 6GR1654-3CH20 A 6GR1654-3CH21 Wiring Switching output Analog output Ckt. diag. No. Order No.

2
SIMATIC PXO560 L90L

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
24 52

M5x8

42

95

12,3

FS10_00278

send
20

27,43 24

rec eiv e

5,8

2/118

Siemens FS 10 2008

5,75

42

43

M12x1 81,5 93

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO830 GL

I Overview
Fork sensor for detecting small objects. Molded plastic enclosure with screw-on or dovetail fastening. Wired with 3 or 4-pole M8 connector. 4 different fork widths: - GL30 = 30 mm - GL50 = 50 mm - GL80 = 80 mm - GL120 = 120 mm Rated operating voltage 24 V DC. Solid-state output pnp. NO or NC contact, adjustable via "teach-in". Versions with external "teach-in".

I Technical specifications
PXO830 GL30 Operating mode Fork width Operating voltage range No-load supply current Io, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Wavelength (illuminant) Switching status indicators Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage Temperature coefficient Type Thru-beam sensor 30 mm 10 30 V DC 30 mA 100 mA 200 Hz 640 nm (red, visible) 4 yellow LEDs Plastic (ABS) IP67 -20 C +60 C -20 C +80 C 0.3 %/K 6GR1802-.... PXO830 GL50 50 mm PXO830 GL80 80 mm PXO830 GL120 120 mm

6GR1804-....

6GR1806-....

6GR1808-....

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/119

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO830 GL

I Selection and Ordering data


Fork width Wiring Switching output External "teach-in" pnp pnp yes pnp pnp yes pnp pnp yes pnp pnp yes Ckt. diag. No. 1 14 1 14 1 14 1 14 Order No.

mm
30 30 50 M8 plug, 3-pole, type A M8 plug, 4-pole, type B M8 plug, 3-pole, type A M8 plug, 4-pole, type B M8 plug, 3-pole, type A M8 plug, 4-pole, type B M8 plug, 3-pole, type A M8 plug, 4-pole, type B Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON A 6GR1802-7AD00 A 6GR1802-7BD05 A 6GR1804-7AD00 A 6GR1804-7BD05 A 6GR1806-7AD00 A 6GR1806-7BD05 A 6GR1808-7AD00 A 6GR1808-7BD05

50 80 80 120 120

SIMATIC PXO830 GL

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions

G
10

FS10_00279

B A
4

T each -in 4,2 8 4,5 1* C 4,5 12


5

1*

All dimensions in mm MLFB 6GR1802 6GR1804 6GR1806 6GR1808 A Fork width 30 50 80 120 B 50 70 100 140 C 30 50 80 120 D 34 54 54 54 E F G

59,5 20 79,5 20 79,5 20 79,5 20 28 2 x 28 3 x 28

2/120

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO840 LV70

I Overview
Fiber-optic conductor sensor for snapping onto a DIN rail to DIN46277-3. Plastic fiber-optic conductors 3RX7.... wired with cable or M8 connector may be used. The function and range depend upon the type of fiber-optic conductor used (see data of your selected fiber-optic conductor) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Solid-state output pnp NO or NC contact, adjustable via "teach-in" LV70A with analog output 0 V to 10 V

I Technical specifications
Operating mode Sensing range Standard target/reflector Operating mode Operating voltage range (DC) No-load supply current Io, max. Rated operating current Ie Analog output Switching frequency Standard Fast mode Fine mode High Distance mode Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Operating voltage Configuration Key lock Make/break function Adjustment mode Timer function Function mode Display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage Temperature coefficient Type PXO840 LV70 PXO840 LV70HF Sensor/thru-beam sensor, depending on fiber-optic conductor Depending on fiber-optic conductor Depending on fiber-optic conductor Standard Standard, Fast, Fine, High Distance 10 30 V DC 20 mA at 24 V 25 mA at 24 V 100 mA 1500 Hz 660 nm, red, visible Yellow LED Green LED no Plastic (ABS) IP64 -20 C +60 C -20 C +80 C 0.3 %/K 6GR1810-.BD05 1000 Hz 8000 Hz 125 Hz 125 Hz PXO840 LV70A

2
0 10 V

Yellow LED Green LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED 4-character, red

6GR1811-7BD05

6GR1811-0CJ 05

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/121

Opto Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO840 LV70

I Selection and Ordering data


Wiring Illuminant Switching output Analog output Ckt. diag. No. pnp 14 pnp 14 pnp 14 pnp 18 Order No.

nm
Cable, 2 m PVC, 4 x 0.14 mm M8 plug, 4-pole, type B M8 plug, 4-pole, type B Cable, 2 m PVC, 5 x 0.14 mm 660, red 660, red 660, red 660, red Light-ON or dark-ONLight-ON or dark-ONLight-ON or dark-ONLight-ON or dark-ON0 to10 V A 6GR1810-0BD05 A 6GR1810-7BD05 A 6GR1811-7BD05 A 6GR1811-0CJ05

Accessories
Plastic fiber optic conductor, type 3RX7 see page 2/123

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions

10 3,4

65

30

FS10_00280

18,65

18,65 32 35,4

2/122

Siemens FS 10 2008

24,3

10,4

84

Opto Proximity Switches


Accessories
Plastic fiber-optic conductor

I Overview
The plastic fiber-optic cables are used in combination with the opto proximity switches of the LV70, K30 and K31 types. The sensing range of the plastic fiber-optic conductors depends on the type of opto proximity switch used. The main advantages are: Extremely small dimensions Small bending radii For cutting to length Visible light Wide range of types Attractively priced.
TW (mm) 50 40 30 20 10 a TW
NSD0_00913a

20

10

10

20 a (mm)

TW = Sensing range
Typical shape of switching zone

I Technical specifications
Attenuation at 660 nm, max. Angle of incidence, max. Standard length Bending radius, min. Tensile load, max. Sleeve material Degree of protection Sensor head Sensor Temperature range Solvent resistance dB/m 0.4 56 m 2 0.1 mm 25 N 30 Polyethylene IP67 IP65 C 40 ... +75 Not resistant

I Selection and Ordering data


Type Sensing range For opto proximity switch Order No.

Plastic fiber-optic conductor for diffuse sensor


M
N S D0 0 9 1 4

3 ( P= 0 , 5 )

7 1 2

2 0 0 0 M
N S D0 0 9 15

+1 0 0 -

2 single fibers, 1 mm, for cutting Adapter sleeves to 2.2 mm included in scope of supply. 20 mm PXO400 Type K31 40 mm PXO400 Type K30 35 mm Type PXO840 LV70 2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting mono/axial 60 mm 120 mm 155 mm

3RX7 001

6 ( P= 0 , 75 )

3RX7 002 PXO400 Type K31 PXO400 Type K30 Type PXO840 LV70

2, 2 20 0 0 M
N S D0 0 9 15 + 10 0 -

1, 8 15

6 ( P= 0 , 75 )

2, 2 20 0 0
M
N S D0 0 9 17 + 10 0 -

2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting coaxial 60 mm 120 mm 150 mm


1, 8 15

3RX7 003 PXO400 Type K31 PXO400 Type K30 Type PXO840 LV70

3 ( P= 0 , 5 )

7 12

1, 2 9 0
+2 -

20 0 0

+ 10 0 -

2 single fibers, 1 mm, for cutting Adapter sleeves to 2.2 mm included in scope of supply 20 mm PXO400 Type K31 40 mm PXO400 Type K30 60 mm Type PXO840 LV70

3RX7 004

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/123

Opto Proximity Switches


Accessories
Plastic fiber-optic conductor
Typ e Sensing ra ng e Fo r o p to p ro x imity sw itc h O rd er N o .

M 6 (P=0,75)
NSD00918

2 sing le fib ers, 2.2 mm, fo r c u tting 6 0 mm 120 mm 14 0 mm P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 1 P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 0 T y p e P X O 84 0 LV 7 0

3R X 7 005

2,2

2,5

2000 + - 100

1,8 15

90

2
M 3 (P=0,5)
NSD00919

Typ e

Sensing ra ng e

Fo r o p to p ro x imity sw itc h

O rd er N o .

Plastic fiber-optic conductor for th ru-beam sensors


2 sing le fib ers 2.2 mm, fo r c u tting (fine interna l fib er) 6 0 mm 120 mm 15 0 mm 3R X 7 006 P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 1 P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 0 P X O 84 0 T y p e L V 7 0

2,2

7 12

2000

+ 100 -

2 sing le fib ers, 2.2 mm, fo r c u tting 200 mm 4 00 mm 3 5 0 mm P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 1 P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 0 P X O 84 0 T y p e L V 7 0

3R X 7 007

M 4 (P=0,7)
NSD00920

M 2,6 (P=0,4 5)

2,2

11

2000 + - 100

M 3 (P=0. 5)
NSD00921

2 sing le fib ers 2.2 mm, fo r c u tting (fine interna l fib er) 6 0 mm 120 mm 120 mm
7 12
0.

3R X 7 008 P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 1 P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 0 P X O 84 0 T y p e L V 7 0

2.

90 + -2

2000 + - 100

2 sing le fib ers, 2.2 mm, fo r c u tting 200 mm 4 00 mm 3 5 0 mm P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 1 P X O 4 00 T y p e K 3 0 P X O 84 0 T y p e L V 7 0

3R X 7 010

M 4 (P=0,7)
NSD00922

1,2

2,2

11 2000 + - 100

90 + -2

2 sing le fib ers, 2.2 mm, fo r c u tting


16 x 0,26 5
FS10_00281

A P X O 84 0 T y p e L V 7 0

3R X 7 012

5,25

20 10 5
10

25 0 mm

2,2

3,2

L = 2000 mm A : Su b jec t to ex p o rt reg u la tio ns: A L = N a nd E C C N = E A R 9 9 H

2/ 124

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Accessories
Plastic fiber-optic conductor
Type Sensing range For opto proximity switch Order No.

F ront lenses
NSD00923

Front lenses (1 pair) for use with fiber type 3RX7 007 1,500 mm 3,000 mm

3RX7 901 PXO400 Type K31 Type K30 3RX7 902 PXO400 Type K31 Type K30

M 2,6 (P=0,45)

5,5 8,7
NSD00924

4,5

Front lenses 90 (1 pair) for use with fiber type 3RX7 007 250 mm 500 mm
5,8 9,7

4,5

2
3RX7 918

M 2,6 (P =0,45)

C utting tool for fiber-optic cable


C utting tool for plastic fibers

NSD00955

51

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/125

Opto Proximity Switches


Accessories
Mounting brackets

I S election and O rdering data


Type M ounting brack et for opto proximity switch with M 18 cylindrical enclosure M aterial: Z inc plated steel
18,5
NSD00953

Order No. 3RX7 301

32

3 12

2
3,3

40

3 20

40

18,75 3,3 6 14

M ounting brack et for opto proximity switch of type of construction K20, K21

3RX7 3080A A 00

30
3,3

20 1,2

NSD00943

7,5

21

4,5
4,2

1,5

M ounting brack et for opto proximity switch of type of construction K30, K31 M aterial: Z inc plated steel

21

4,5

3RX7 910

10 10

4,2

NSD 00944a

42

33
4,2 4,2

16,5

8 8

4,5

21 30
49

7,5

M ounting brack et for 35 mm rail for opto proximity switch of type of construction K30, K31 M aterial: Z inc plated steel

37,5

41 15

21
NSD00945a

2/126

Siemens FS 10 2008

21 30

4,5

3RX7 304

4,5

Opto Proximity Switches


Accessories
Mounting brackets
Type
30 13 R25 R14 R25 34 63
NSD00950

Order No. 3RX7 303

137 5 31,5 R62 26,5

Mounting bracket for opto proximity switch of type of construction K80 Material: Zinc plated steel
63

16

R73
5,3

10

Mounting bracket, alignable, for opto proximity switch with M18 cylindrical enclosure, especially for laser proximity switches of type of construction L18 Material: Zinc plated steel
50

3RX7 300

NSD00952

50

28

M 18

30

13

4,2x 6,2 2

42

Mounting bracket for laser proximity switch of type of construction L50 Material: Zinc plated steel

3RX7 302

NSD00951

48 19 49 24 10,5
4,3

7,5 4 23 32

4,3

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/127

Opto Proximity Switches


Accessories
Reflectors

I Selection and Ordering data


Type Standard for type of construction Order No.

FS10_00244

D 25 D iameter 26.2 mm Typical range approx. 40 % , referred to Type D 84


23 26,2 5,5

3RX7 914-0AA01

D 40 D iameter 40 mm Typical range approx. 60 % , referred to Type D 84


FS10_00245

3RX7 915-0AA01

37 40,2

5,5

D 84 D iameter 82 mm

M12, M18, K30, K31, C40, K80

3RX7 916-0AA01

4,6

FS10_00246

7 8,3 82,1

2,5 8,5

7 ,5

FS10_00248

S48 D iameter 48 mm Typical range approx. 50 % , referred to Type D 84

M18 P, K50

3RX7 922-0AA01

86 74 48

63 8,5

4,5

4,6

R45 Reflector 48 mm 48 mm Typical range approx. 60 % , referred to Type D 84


48 61 71

Light array

3RX7 924-0AA01

FS10_00249

36 48 51,15

2/128

Siemens FS 10 2008

Opto Proximity Switches


Accessories
Reflectors
Type Standard for type of construction K20, K21 Order No.

FS10_00241

3,85 3,8

3,5

41 36,95 34

R60 Reflector 37 mm 56 mm Typical range approx. 40 to 50 %, referred to Type D84

3RX7 305-0AA01

51,99 56 60

2
R70 Reflector 58 x 22 mm Typical range approx. 30 %, referred to Type D84 3RX7 920-0AA01

FS10_00247

58,2 71 82 4,5

22

4 7,5
R84 Reflector 84 mm 84 mm High degree of reflection for long range 3RX7 306-0AA01

FS10_00242

85 80 77

3,5

66,97 77 85

3,2 8,5

60,3
FS10_00243

30

3,85

RL 50 Reflector for laser light, 47 mm 47 mm

L50

3RX7 307-0AA01

51,4 47,25 29,5

4,8 47,9 51,25

8,8

3,4 8,5

Reflecting foil 100 mm 100 mm, range 50 to 60 %, referred to Type D84 Reflecting foil 250 x 250 mm Standard for type of construction L90L

3RX7 917-0AA01 3RX7 332

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/129

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
I nductive proximity sw itches rugged, accurate and reliable
Inductiv e proximity switches are av ailable W ith operating distances from 0.6 75 mm 7 In cylindrical and cubic designs 7 In the standard v ersion as 3- and 4-wire sensors 7 As 2-wire sensors for solid-state inputs 7 For extra duty (65 V DC or 320 V AC/DC) 7 To degree of protection IP68 for extreme env ironmental conditions 7 W ith increased operating distances 7 For welding applications 7 W ithout a reduction factor 7 W ith ATEX approv al.
7

Application examples

For contact-free detection of metal objects, proximity switches are q uite simply the most cost-effectiv e solution. If an excellent conductor of electricity or magnetism mov es towards the sensor or away from it, the signal automatically changes. W ith their excellent repeat accuracy, they are extremely reliable. And thanks to their wear-free operation and insensitiv ity to temperature, noise, light and water, they hav e a long serv ice life. W e hav e cov ered the complete application spectrum with a wide range of different types and ranges.

Recognition of broken drills

H ig h lig h t s
Extremely compact and rugged High degree of protection (IP67/IP68/IP69K) Correction factor 1 High sensing ranges Fast switching freq uencies Flexible mounting Especially suitable for small spaces Can be used all ov er the world: U L/CSA approv als

Recognition of positioning screws on the wheel for v elocity or direction control

I Application
Inductiv e proximity switches are the low-cost solution for noncontact detection of metal objects. They are used in sectors in which metal components play an important role, e.g. 7 In the motor industry 7 In mechanical engineering 7 In the robotics industry 7 In conv eyor systems and 7 In the paper and printing industry The induction principle and the experience gained by Siemens ov er many years hav e made the inductiv e proximity switches what they are: extremely reliable with a v ery high repeat accuracy and long serv ice life thanks to a lack of wearing parts as well as their insensitiv ity to temperature, noise, light and water. Our customers also benefit from the wide range of inductiv e proximity switches that Siemens offers. Our complete range meets a wide range of different req uirements and leav es no wishes unfulfilled.

Recognition of the v alv e position (completely open or closed)

Recognition of cans and lids

2/130

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
The inductive proximity switches are classified according to their application potential or their technical characteristics:
SIMAT IC sensors Fields of application and Voltage range special characteristics Sensors for standard applications and for PLCs Operating distance acc. to standard 10 V to 30 V DC or 15 V to 34 V DC Output 2-wire proximity switch: 1 NO contact, up to 25 mA residual current and voltage drop suitable for PLC inputs, minimal wiring outlay, both current source and current sink, power is supplied from PLC input 3-wire proximity switch: 1 NO or 1 NC, up to 200 mA, pnp or npn 4-wire proximity switch: 1 NO and 1 NC (antivalent), pnp, up to 200 mA 3-wire proximity switch: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp 2-wire proximity switch: 1 NO or 1 NC 3-wire proximity switch: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp Easy adaptation to different rated operating voltages Insensitive to voltage deviations Operating distance far above the standard, up to three times the rated operating distance defined in the standard G reat installation flexibility A smaller design can be selected for the required operating distance Reduction of actuation distance is corrected for non-ferrous metals Sensors for extreme environmental conditions (IP68 / IP69K) 2-wire proximity switch: 20 to 320 V AC/DC 3-wire proximity switch: 15 to 34 V DC, 10 to 65 V DC 4-wire proximity switch: 15 to 34 V DC 3-wire proximity switch: 10 to 30 V DC 3-wire proximity switch: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp, up to 300 mA 4-wire proximity switch: 1 NO and 1 NC (antivalent), pnp, up to 200 mA Can be used under extreme environmental conditions according to IP68 by use of a well-sealed enclosure with a special casting compound Special advantages

PXI200

PXI300

Sensors for extra duty

3-wire proximity switch: 10 to 65 V DC 2-wire proximity switch: 20 to 320 V AC/DC

Sensors with greater operating distance

3-wire proximity switch: 10 to 65 V DC

PXI400

Sensors without a reduction factor; for welding applications

3-wire proximity switch: 1 NO, pnp up to 200 mA

No reduction factor for non-ferrous metals Welding/magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. = approx. 21 kA at 25.4 mm

PXI600

Sensors for Ex Zone 2 Approval for gas: EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Approval for dust: EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C X

4-wire proximity switch: 10 to 30 V DC

4-wire proximity switch: 1 NO + 1 NC, pnp up to 200mA

PXI900

Pressure-resistant sensors 3-wire proximity switch: up to 500 bar (7250 psi) 10 to 30 V DC

3-wire proximity switch: 1 NO, pnp up to 200 mA Operating distance: 3 mm

Suitable for extreme dynamic mechanical stress Easy to install: The proximity switch can be screw fastened against a stop, no adjustment required Sensing face seal is gas-tight

Sensors with analog output

3-wire proximity switch: 10 to 30 V DC

Voltage output 0 to 5 V DC Current output 1 to 5 mA Non-lineariz ed design

Configurator A configurator for inductive proximity switches is available in the A& D Mall. Based on the technical features required, the desired product can be quickly and easily selected, placed in the shopping cart and ordered. Additional information is available in the Internet under: www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/131

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Approvals 3 R G 4 0, 3 R G 4 1 d ev ic es w ith M 12 o r M 18 c o nnec to rs a s w ell a s termina l c o mp a rtments a re U L a nd C SA listed . Fo r a c o mp lete o v erv iew , see th e A p p end ix . S en sors for E x Z on e 2/ 22 T h e P X I6 00 ind u c tiv e p ro x imity sw itc h es a re a p p ro v ed a c c o rd ing to E U G u id eline 9 4 /9 /E G (A T E X ) A p p end ix V III

I D esig n
C on d i ti on s E N 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -2 (V D E 06 6 0, P a rt 208). Mi ni m um di stan ce T h e p ro x imity sw itc h es mu st no t interfere w ith ea c h o th er. T h erefo re a minimu m d ista nc e a mu st b e left b etw een tw o d ev ic es. T h e d ista nc e a d ep end s u p o n th e siz e a nd ty p e o f th e d ev ic e (see d ia g ra ms in d imensio n d ra w ing s).

T h e a p p ro v a l is fo r: G a s E X II 3 G E E x nA II T 6 x a nd D u st E X II 3 D IP 6 5 T 80 C T h e fu nc tio na lity o f th e ind u c tiv e p ro x imity sw itc h es w ith A T E X a p p ro v a l is id entic a l to th a t o f th e sta nd a rd p ro x imity sw itc h es. P erson al safety U p p p
NSD0_00801

se o f th e ind u c tiv e p ro x imity sw itc h es is no t ermissib le fo r a p p lic a tio ns in w h ic h th e sa fety o f erso ns is d ep end ent o n th e fu nc tio n o f th e ro x imity sw itc h ..

NSD0_007 9 6

C on n ectors Fo r c y lind ric a l ty p es, 8 mm c o mb ina tio n p lu g s o r c o nnec to rs w ith M 12 th rea d a re su p p lied a s sta nd a rd (3 o r 4 -p o le). A c a b le ja c k is a lso req u ired fo r th e p lu g -a nd -so c k et c o nnec tio ns, see A c c esso ries. C o nnec to rs w ith M 18 th rea d (3 -p o le) a re a lso a v a ila b le a s a n o p tio n fo r th e M 18 a nd M 3 0 v ersio ns. C ab les G enera lly sp ea k ing , th e c a b les u sed a re h ig h ly flex ib le w ith o ilresista nt, p o ly u reth a ne (P U R ) o u ter sh ea th s a nd a sta nd a rd leng th o f 2m. P lea se o rd er d ev ic es w ith a P V C c a b le fo r a p p lic a tio ns in w h ic h c a b les w ill c o me into c o nta c t w ith a c id o r ly e. Fo r d ev ic es intend ed fo r u se a s p er U L a nd C SA , o rd er a P V C c a b le. C a b les in a lterna tiv e leng th s a nd ma teria ls c a n b e su p p lied o n req u est. C ab le len g th Fo r th e p ro x imity sw itc h , lo ng c a b les mea n th a t: T h e o u tp u t is su b jec t to c a p a c itiv e lo a d Interferenc e sig na ls h a v e a g rea ter influ enc e C a b le leng th s o f 3 00 m sh o u ld no t b e ex c eed ed , ev en in fa v o ra b le c o nd itio ns. R ou ti n g th e cab les D o no t ro u te p ro x imity sw itc h c o nnec ting c a b les in a c a b le d u c t th a t ru ns p a ra llel to c a b les th a t a re u sed to sw itc h ind u c tiv e lo a d s (e.g . c o nta c to r c o ils, so leno id v a lv es, mo to rs) o r to c o nd u c t c u rrents fro m elec tro nic mo to r d riv es. K eep c a b les a s sh o rt a s p o ssib le; h o w ev er, w h en ro u ted u nd er id ea l c o nd itio ns (lo w c o u p ling c a p a c ita nc e, minima l interferenc e v o lta g es), th ey ma y h a v e a leng th o f u p to 3 00 m. T h e fo llo w ing mea su res ma y b e ta k en to red u c e th e effec t o f interferenc e: D ista nc e fro m c a b les c a u sing interferenc e > 100 mm Sh ield s C o ils (o f c o nta c to rs, rela y s, so leno id v a lv es) a re w ired w ith R C elements o r v a risto rs.

2/132

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Degree of protection
Degree o f p ro tectio n to I E C 60529 F il e m eans 6 7 Protection against the ingress of dust. Complete protection against electric shock. Protection against water, if the equipment is to be immersed in water under defined pressure and time conditions. W ater must not penetrate in amounts that would damage the device. Protection against the ingress of dust. Complete protection against electric shock. Protection against the ingress of water on submersion. Test co nd itio ns/ N o tes Test conditions: Depth of immersion 1 m Time 30 min If the device is to be exposed to water or humidity for longer periods, devices with IP68 must be selected. The leak test is based on IEC 60068-2-17, test ql. Contrary to the standard, the test object is not stored in water but in a humid atmosphere, because this kind of exposure constitutes greater stress. Parameters: Initial conditions: O perating distance at Tu = 25 C 5 C Test fluid: Tap water Temperature of test fluid: 105 C 5 C Test pressure: 12 N/cm (1.2 bar) Duration of exposure to stress: 5 days Recovery: Drying at room temperature and cooling. The final measurement takes place as soon as the test object has reached room temperature. Final measurement: O perating distance at Tu = 25 C 5 C. The permitted change is 10 % of the initial state.

I P 67

I P 68

6 8

I P 69K

Protection against the ingress of dust. Complete protection against electric shock.

9K Protection against the ingress of water during high-pressure steam cleaning. (i.e.: W ater that is aimed at the housing under greatly increased pressure must not have any damaging effect.)

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/133

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
I Fu nction
In the proximity switch, a high-frequency alternating field is generated, which emerges from the "active surface" of the proximity switch. The size of this alternating field determines the "range" of the switch. The approach of an electrically and/or magnetically conductive material attenuates this field. B oth states (field attenuated or not attenuated) are evaluated in the proximity switch and result in a signal change at the output. Built-in precautions The suppressor circuits installed in most proximity switches (see selection tables) allow easy handling and protect the devices from destruction. Protection is possible against Spurious signals Short circuit and overload (DC) Reversal of all connections Wire break (connection L or L+ ) Overvoltage peaks Disturbance from radio communication devices. Spurious signal suppression When operating voltage is applied, the transient condition of the sensor coil causes the "attenuated" state to be simulated even if no actuator is present. Spurious signal suppression prevents the output from switching on during this period. Short-circuit and overload protection All DC devices with a 3 and 4-wire connection are equipped with short-circuit and overload protection. Short circuits between the output and the operating voltage connections do not damage the proximity switches and are always permitted; overload is also permitted without restriction. The LEDs do not function during a short circuit. Reverse-polarity protection All DC devices with 3 and 4-wire connection are protected against any reversal of polarity on all connections. Wire-break protection The DC version is designed in such a way that the proximity switch does not emit a spurious signal when any connection suffers a wire break (not in the case of the 3RG46 and all 4-wire proximity switches). A spurious signal is any signal other than 0 that is present for more than 2 ms and has a current in excess of the residual current. Inductive interference protection When inductive loads are cut off, the output voltage (without protective circuit) increases to high levels, which may result in the destruction of the output transistor. For this reason, the outputs of the proximity switches feature a Z ener diode, which limits the cutoff voltage to a safe level (3-wire proximity switches). When inductive loads with a current > 100 mA and also switching frequency > 10 H z are connected, the mounting of a freewheeling diode directly on the load is recommended (due to the loss of power in the built-in Z ener diode). Protection against the influence of radio devices H igh-frequency sensitivity is reduced to such an extent as to ensure compliance with standard IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 (test field strength 10 V/m). Protection against electrostatic discharge The devices are designed in such a way that they are not destroyed by electrostatic discharge as per IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 (8 kV). Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) All inductive proximity switches satisfy the protection requirements of EMC Directive No. 89/336/EEC. This is certified by the application of standard EN 60 947-5-2. The individual tests are governed by the following EMC standards: EN 55 011, IEC-CISPR 11 IEC 61 000-4-2, Level 3 IEC 61 000-4-3, Level 3 IEC 61 000-4-4, Level 3 IEC 61 000-4-6. Displays (L ED) Most proximity switches are equipped with one or two light-emitting diodes (LEDs). The yellow LED indicates the switching state: Proximity switches with make function: Proximity switch attenuated = LED lights up Proximity switches with break function: Proximity switch not attenuated = LED lights up Proximity switches with make and break function: Proximity switches attenuated = LED lights up. The green LED indicates that operating voltage is present. This function is only incorporated in some of the devices.

I Tech nical specifications


G eneral technical specifications
Differential travel H Max. permissible cable length (unshielded) AC/DC Ambient temperature in operation During storage Shock resistance Resistance to vibration Reduction factor Proximity switch for flush or non-flush mounting (typical values) - Stainless steel - Aluminum - Copper - B rass Proximity switch without a reduction factor Voltage drop 2-wire proximity switch 3-wire proximity switch 4-wire proximity switch

H max. 0.2 sr
100 m/300 m 25 ... + 85 C 1) 2) 40 ... + 85 C 1) 30 g, 18 ms duration 55 H z, 1 mm amplitude

0.7 ... 0.9 0.35 ... 0.5 0.2 ... 0.4 0.3 ... 0.6 1 8V 2.5 V 2.5 V

1) 3RG41 and 3RG46 up to + 70 C. 2) Maximum switching current for three-wire proximity switches for standard duty at operating temperatures >50 C is 150 mA.

Fastening nuts
Design M8 M12 Material B rass Stainless steel B rass Molded plastic Stainless steel Molded plastic B rass Molded plastic Stainless steel B rass Molded plastic Stainless steel Tightening torque Nm 2 5 10 1 25 0,5 20 3 50 40 5 100

M14 M18

M30

2/134

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
I S chematics
Circuit diagram 1
1 L+

Circuit diagram 11
BN

Circuit diagram 21
L+
1 L+

I
NO + NC
NSD00642

2 4 3

I
L
NO
NSD0065 2a

BK BU

I
L
NO
NSD00662

2/4 3 L

Circuit diagram 2
1 L+

Circuit diagram 12
BN L+

Circuit diagram 22
1 L+

I
NO
NSD00643

4 3 L

I
NC
NSD0065 3

BK BU L

I
4
NO
NSD00663

Circuit diagram 3
1 L+

Circuit diagram 13
BN L+

Circuit diagram 23
1 L+

I
NC
NSD00644

2 3 L

I
NO
NSD0065 4

BK BU L

I
NC NO
NSD00664

2/4 3 L

Circuit diagram 4
1 L+

Circuit diagram 14
BN L+

Circuit diagram 24
1/3

I
NO
NSD00645

4 3 L

I
NC
NSD0065 5

BK BU L

I
2/4
NC NO
NSD00665

L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+ )

Circuit diagram 5
1 L+

Circuit diagram 15
BN L+

Circuit diagram 25
3 L

I
NC
NSD00646

2 3 L

I
BU
NO
NSD0065 6

I
L
NO + NC
NSD00666

4 2 1 L+

Circuit diagram 6
1 L+

Circuit diagram 16
BK

Circuit diagram 26
L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+ )
NSD00667

1/3

L+

I
4
NO
NSD00647

I
L
NO
NSD0065 7

I
NO

X 2/4 L

BK

Circuit diagram 7
1 L+ L

Circuit diagram 17
BK

Circuit diagram 27
L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+ )

1/3

L+

I
NO
NSD00648

4 3

I
BK
NC
NSD0065 8

I
NC
NSD00668

X
NO

2/4

Circuit diagram 8
3

Circuit diagram 18
L1/L+ N/L N/L L1/L+
1 L+

Circuit diagram 28
1 L+

I
4
NO

I
NO + NC
NSD0065 9

4 2 3 L

I
NO
NSD01167

4 3 L

Circuit diagram 9
1

Circuit diagram 19
L1/L+ N/L N/L L1/L+
1 L+

Circuit diagram 29
1 L+

I
2
NC
NSD0065 0

I
NO
NSD00660

2/4 3 L

I
NO
NSD01168

4 3 L

Circuit diagram 10
BN L+

Circuit diagram 20
1 L+

Circuit diagram 30
BN BK W H +U A 1 A 2 0V R
L2 B

I
NO + NC
NSD0065 1

W H BK BU

I
L
NC
NSD00661

2/4 3 L
NSD00669

L1

BU

Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60 757: BK = Black BN = Brown BU = Blue WH = White

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/135

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Examples of connections
Parallel connection Series connection1) Parallel circuit w ith 1 contact (NO or NC) Series connection w ith 1 contact (NO or NC) 1)

DC voltage version
2-w ire proximity sw itches, for PL C Not possible since the total of all proximity switch residual currents must be smaller than the holding current of the load Not possible, as Ub 15 V n ------------------8V Ub PLC: 24 V
L L BN BU
NSD00670

BN BU L

NSD00671

3-w ire proximity sw itches, pnp


I BK BU BN I BK BU
NSD00672

L BN I BK BU BN I L
NSD00673

L BN

L BN

BK BU L

BK BU L

NSD00675

NSD00674

BK BU L

Other connections are not permissible.

Ub U min ------------------- +1 2.5 V Uc = Ub (n 2.5 V)


n 3-w ire proximity sw itches, npn
I BU BK BN BU BK BN
NSD00676

L BU I BK BN I

L BU BK BN L
NSD00678

L BU

BK BN L

BU I L
NSD00677

NSD00679

BK BN L

Ub U min ------------------- +1 2.5 V Uc = Ub (n 2.5 V)


n 4-w ire proximity sw itches, pnp
I BN BK WH BU BN BK WH BU L L
NSD01188

L BN BK WH BU BN BK WH BU L

L BN BK WH BU

L BN BK WH BU

I L
NSD01189

NSD01190

NSD01187

AC/DC version
I
BK BK L1(L ) L1(L ) L1(L ) BK BK N(L )
NSD00682

L1(L ) BK BK N(L )

BK BK

BK BK N(L )

NSD00683

BK BK N(L )

NSD00680 NSD00681

With DC voltage operation, a diode must be connected in parallel to the primarily inductive load.

The total of all proximity switch residual currents must be smaller than the holding current of the load

20 V Uc = Ub (n 8 V) Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60 757: BK = Black BN = Brown BU = Blue WH = White

b --------

Ub = operating voltage Uc = minimum operating voltage of load n = number of proximity switches Umin = minimum permissible operating voltage
1)

The power-up delay of the sensors must be considered when determining the switching times.

2/136

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
I Characteristic curves
Response curves The response curves are determined using standard targets according to EN 60947-5-2.
Operating distance 0.6 mm (normal) 3RG46 03, 3RG46 00, 3RG4610
y m m 1

Operating distance 0.8 mm (normal) 3RG 46 .0, 3RG 46 36


y m m 1

Operating distance 1 mm (normal) 3RG40 11


y m m 1,0 0,8 0,6

Operating distance 1.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 .....33 (shorty)


y m m 1,5 1

0,8 0,6
NSD00301

0,8 0,6
NSD00303

NSD00318

0,5

0,2 1,5 -x 1 0,5 0 0,5 m m

0,2 2 -x m m 1 0 1

0,2 2 -x m m 1 0 1

1+x 1,5 m m

+x 2 m m

+x 2 m m

3 -x 2 m m

2 +x 3 m m

Operating distance 1.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 .....05, 3RG46 01, 3RG46 11, 3RG46 37
y m m 1,5

Operating distance 1.5 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 11


y m m 1,5

Operating distance 2 mm (normal) 3RG40 12, 3RG40 52, 3RG40 7.


y m m 2

Operating distance 2 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 11


y m m 2 1,6

1 1
NSD00331 NSD00331

0,5

NSD00362

1 0,5 -x m m 4 2 0 2 4 +x m m

1,2
NSD00355

0,5

0,8 0,4 -x m m 4 2 0 2 4 +x m m

3 -x 2 m m

2 +x 3 m m

3 -x 2 m m

2 +x 3 m m

Operating distance 2.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 21, 3RG40 60


y m m 2,5 2 1,5
NSD00390

Operating distance 2.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 72


y m m 2,5 2

Operating distance 2.5 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 02, 3RG46 11


y m m 2,5 2 1,5

0,5 -x 4 m m 2 0 2 4 +x m m

NSD00401

0,5 -x 4 m m 2 0 2 4 +x m m

0,5 -x 4 m m 2 0 2 4 +x m m

Operating distance 3 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 11


y m m 3

Operating distance 3 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 02, 3RG46 37


y m m 4

Operating distance 3 mm U BERO) 3RG46 12


y m m 3,5 3,0 2,5 2,0

NSD00390

Operating distance 3 mm (pressure-resistant) 3RG46 52


y m m 3 2
NSD00415

2
NSD00394

3
NSD00396

1 6 -x 4 m m 2 0 2

1,0 0,5 -x m m 4 2 0 2 4 +x m m

3 -x 2 m m

2 +x 3 m m

4 +x 6 m m

3 -x 2 m m

2 +x 3 m m

Operating distance 4 mm (normal) 3RG40 22, 3RG40 62


y m m 4

Operating distance 4 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 12


y m m 4

Operating distance 4 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 21


y m m 4 3

NSD00422

NSD00422

2 1 -x 4 m m 2 0 2 4 +x m m

2 1 -x 4 m m 2 0 2 4 +x m m

2 1 -x 4 m m 2 0 2 4 +x m m

NSD0_00426

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00394

1,5

NSD00330

0,4

0,4

0,4

2/137

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

Operating distance 5 mm (normal) 3RG40 13, 3RG40 53


y mm 5 4 3
NSD00450

Operating distance 5 mm (normal) 3RG40 82


y mm 5 4 3
NSD00474

Operating distance 5 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 13


y mm 5 4 3
NSD00462

Operating distance 6 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 21, 3RG46 12


y mm 10 8 6
NSD00482

2 1 -x 8 mm 4 0 4

2 1 -x 8 mm 4 0 4

2 1

4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4

8 +x mm

8 +x mm

-x 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 +x

mm

mm

8 +x mm

Operating distance 0 ... 6 mm (analog) 3RG46 12


5 4 3
NSD00487

Operating distance 8 mm (normal) 3RG40 23, 3RG40 63


y mm 10 8 6
NSD00499

Operating distance 8 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 13


y mm 10 8 6
NSD00499

Operating distance 8 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 22


y mm 10 8 6
NSD00491

y mm

2 1 1 2 3 4

4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4

4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4

4 2 -x 4 mm 2 0 2

5 S mm

I A mA UA V

8 +x mm

8 +x mm

4 +x mm

Operating distance 10 mm (normal) 3RG40 14, 3RG40 54, 3RG46 25


y mm 10 8 6
NSD00516

Operating distance 10 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 22


y mm 10 8 6
NSD00516

Operating distance 10 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 14


y mm 10 8 6
NSD00531

Operating distance 12 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 13


y mm 20 16 12
NSD00542

4 2 -x 10 mm 5 0 5 10 +x mm

4 2 -x 10 mm 5 0 5 10 +x mm

4 2 -x 12 8 mm

8 4 -x 20 10 mm 0

4 0 4 8 12 +x mm

10 20 +x mm

Operating distance 12 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 23


y mm 12 10 8 6
NSD00540

Operating distance 15 mm (normal) 3RG40 24, 3RG40 31, 3RG 40 64


y m m 20 16 12

Operating distance 15 mm (normal) 3RG40 30, 3RG40 34


y mm 20 16

Operating distance 15 mm (normal) 3RG40 38


y mm 20 16 12

NSD00562

N S D 0547

4 2 mm

4 -x 1 0 m m 5 0 5 10 +x m m

4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8

4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8

-x 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 +x

mm

16 +x mm

16 +x mm

Operating distance 15 mm
(extra duty) 3RG46 12
y m m 20 16 12 8 4 -x 1 0 m m 5 0 5 10 +x m m
N S D 0547

Operating distance 15 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 34, 3RG46 38


y mm 25 20 15 10 5 mm
NSD00568

-x 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 +x

mm

2/138

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD01170

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

Operating distance 20 mm (normal) 3RG40 41, 3RG46 26


y mm 20

Operating distance 20 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 23


y mm 25 20 15

Operating distance 20 mm (extra duty) 3RG 41 34, 3RG46 38


y mm 20

Operating distance 20 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 38


y mm 20 15

12
NSD00581

12 10
NSD00581 NSD00573 NSD01171

8 4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8

10 5 -x 40 20 mm 0

8 4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8

5 -x 20 10 mm 0

16 +x mm

20 40 +x mm

16 +x mm

10 20 +x mm

5 4 3 2 1

Operating distance 20 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 12


y mm 25 20 15
NSD00577

Operating distance 22 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 14


y mm 30 24 18
NSD00592

Operating distance 25 mm (normal) 3RG40 32


y mm 25 20 15
NSD00594

Operating distance 25 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 31, 3RG41 41


y mm 25 20 15
NSD00594

10 5

12 6 -x 40 20 mm 0

10 5 -x 20 10 mm 0

10 5 -x 20 10 mm 0

-x 12 8 4 0 4 8 12 +x mm mm

20 40 +x mm

10 20 +x mm

10 20 +x mm

Operating distance 25 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 44, 3RG46 48


y mm 30 25 20 15 10 5
NSD00598

Operating distance 30 mm (normal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 42


y mm 30 24 18
NSD00604

Operating distance 30 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 44


y mm 30 24 18
NSD00604

Operating distance 35 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 48


y mm 50 40 30
NSD01172 NSD00640 NSD00620

12 6 -x 30 15 mm 0

12 6 -x 30 15 mm 0

20 10 -x 40 20 mm 0

-x 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 +x mm mm

15 30 +x mm

15 30 +x mm

20 40 +x mm

Operating distance 35 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 48


y mm 50 40 30
NSD00612

Operating distance 40 mm (normal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 43


y mm 50 40
30
NSD00626

Operating distance 40 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 24


y mm 50 40 30
NSD00614

Operating distance 40 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 41


y mm 50 40

20 10 -x 30 15 mm 0

20 10 -x 30 15 mm 0

20 10 -x 80 40 mm 0

20 10 -x 40 20 mm 0

15 30 +x mm

15 30 +x mm

40 80 +x mm

20 40 +x mm

Operating distance 40 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 44


y mm 50 40

Operating distance 50 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 42


mm 50 40 30
NSD00635a

Operating distance 65 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 43


y mm 80 60
NSD00638

Operating distance 75 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 43


y mm 100 80 60 40 20 -x 80 40 mm 0

NSD00630

20 10 -x 40 20 mm 0

20 10

40 20
-x 60 40 20 0

20 40 +x mm

-x 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 +x

20 40 60 +x

mm

mm

mm

mm

40 80 +x mm

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/139

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
I M ore information
Glossary for proximity switches Terms associated with the technology of proximity switches are explained below. Some of the terms are defined in IEC 60947-5-2. Active surface The active surface of an inductive proximity switch is the surface through which an electromagnetic field is emitted (IEC). O utput The proximity switches are available with different output connections.
L+

The corresponding activation element (target) is moved toward this surface to trigger a switching process. Response curve The line on which all response points A for a proximity switch can be found. The curve has been determined using the standard target. The sensor-related characteristics can be obtained from it. The proximity switch axis z coincides with the y axis.
y z x Ak x x B A B A H s x x

LNSD01055

2-wire, DC or AC/DC, load connected in series with proximity switch


L+

LNSD01057

Se n sin g fac e x
NSD0 01

3-wire, DC, pnp, load connected between A and L


L+

Ak A B H s x x y z

Response curve Response point Release point Hysteresis Operating distance Direction of movement Axial distance to target Distance from proximity switch Reference axis

LNSD01056

Response point A The position of the actuating element when the signal is output. The reference point is the bottom front edge of the actuating element. Response delay tA The response delay is the duration which the switching element requires for response when the target enters or leaves the sensing range (IEC). The value is measured at s = 0.5 sn. N on-eq uivalence The 4-wire proximity switches have two outputs: A1 with NO function and A2 with NC function. T ightening torq ue Excessive tightening of the nuts could mechanically damage the proximity switches. The maximum permissible torques are specified in the Technical specifications. O perating distance Sa See operating distances Axial distance to target x Distance between the actuating element and the proximity switch axis z at the response point A.

3-wire, DC, npn, load connected between A and L+


L+

A2 A1

LNSD01058

4-wire, antivalent, DC, load connected between A1, A2 and L

O utput resistance The proximity switches have a built-in output resistance so that the output voltage can follow the switching status even without an external load. A load resistance must be connected when operating with high switching frequencies (to reduce the electric time constant). Axial approach Axial approaching of the target is where its center point is located in the reference axis (IEC). Rated operational current Ie (output current) The sensors are designed for a specific maximum output current. If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload protection will be activated. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have effects similar to an overload. See also spurious switch-on pulse.

Power-up delay tv Duration between switching on the power supply and the beginning of the proximity switchs operational readiness (IEC).

2/140

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Operational voltage The operating voltage is specified including 10% residual ripple. Operating temperature The specified operating temperature range must not be exceeded. The proximity switch could then be damaged, and the operating response is undefined. Reference axis z Axis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IEC). See also mounting instructions. Installation Shielded proximity switches A proximity switch can be shielded if any attenuating material (metal) can be attached around the active surface without influencing the characteristic features (IEC). To ensure perfect functioning, a gap should be left in front of the active surface.
Sensing face

ZJ ZF ZB Q d w z r A

NSD01061

Ak
c

Ak A c, g d Q r w z ZB ZF ZJ

Response curve Response point Partial heights of transition region proximity switch diameter Active surface Radius of free zone Mounting condition Reference axis Attenuation zone Free zone Inactive zone

Differential travel H Distance between the switching points when the target approaches or is removed from the proximity switch (IEC). The differential travel causes a defined switching response for the devices. The switching distance always refers to the switchon point.

M etal

BE RO
Directio n o f mo v ement
NSD01060

Unshielded proximity switches A proximity switch cannot be shielded if a certain free zone is required around its active surface in order to retain the characteristic features (IEC).
Sensing face

Switch -o ff p o int Switch -o n p o int Op erating distance s

Differential trav el Resp o nse cu rv es


NSD01053

Smallest operating current Im (minimum load current) The current required to retain the conductivity of the switching elements in the ON state (IEC). This applies to 2-wire proximity switches.

M etal

BE RO
NSD01062

Magnetic fields Permanent magnetic fields and low-frequency alternating fields do not generally influence the function of the proximity switches. Strong fields may saturate the ferrite core of the switch and thus increase the operating distance or switch the device. On the other hand, damage is not probable. High-frequency fields with frequencies of several hundred kHz can considerably interfere with the function (operating frequency of the sensors). Shielding is recommended in the event of difficulties with interference fields. Target (actuating element) Parts made of metal with which proximity switches are actuated in service. Form, material and dimensions influence the response characteristic of the proximity switch (see reduction factors). The specified rated operating distances sn were determined using the minimum surface defined in the standard (see characteristic). The usable operating distance Su is reduced if the surface is less than the minimum. Power supply units Single-phase power supply units must be smoothed with at least 1000 F/A. For noise suppression reasons, this measure is also necessary with three-phase power supply units.

Semi-shielded proximity switches A proximity switch that is semi-shielded also requires a certain free zone. However, flush mounting is permissible in non-attenuating materials. Free zone Range around the proximity switch which must be kept free of materials which interfere with the characteristic features of the switch (IEC). The volume of the free zone is defined by the dimensions r, c and w, g (see graphic).

Standard target The standard target is a defined part used for comparison mea-

surements of the operating distances and sensing ranges (IEC). Material of standard target: Steel St 37, 1 mm thick
Siemens FS 10 2008

2/141

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Dimensions of square standard target: the side length is equal to the diameter of the inscribed circle on the active surface of the proximity switch or three times the rated operating distance sn if 3 Sn is greater than the diameter of the inscribed circle. npn connection The output stage contains an npn transistor which connects the load to the negative operating voltage (0 V). The load is connected between the output and the positive operating voltage (+UB).
+U B

ating distances usually result with other arrangements. The reduction factors (see Technical specifications) are only approximate values. Deviations may result depending on different alloys and the type. Influence of geometry If a smaller target is used than the standard target defined in IEC 60947-5-2, the operating distance must be corrected by a reduction factor.
NSD01054

1,0 0,8

Reduction factor

0,6 0,4 0,2 0 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 1,2 Relative side length of target

RL
A Load 0V
NSD01049

Series connection See Catalog FS 10 Residual voltage The residual voltage is the voltage measured across the load with the output disabled. Residual current ir The residual current is the current which flows in the load circuit of the proximity switch in the disabled condition (IEC). It is used to retain the function, and must primarily be observed with parallel connections. Residual ripple The maximum value of the residual ripple from peak to peak must not exceed 10% of the rated voltage Un. The switching response may be undefined if the residual ripple is large. Correction is possible using a larger smoothing capacitor or a regulated power supply. Release point B The position, e.g. in the attenuation zone, at which the bottom rear edge of the actuating element is located at the moment the signal changes when removing. Operating distance The operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference axis (IEC). Measurement of the operating distance is carried out according to IEC 60947-5-2 using a standard target and axial approach. Rated operating distance sn The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defining the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC). This operating distance applies when using the standard target according to IEC 60947-5-2. Reduction factors must be considered if the material and/or size of the target differ from those of the standard target. Effective operating distance sr Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC). This is the operating distance for a particular switch measured according to IEC 60947-5-2. The manufacturing tolerance is 10%: 0.9 sn < sr < 1.1 sn

Resistance to oil The proximity switches with degree of protection IP67 are not suitable for permanent operation in an environment containing oil. The following must therefore be observed: Lubricating oils Usually present no problem. Hydraulic oils, cutting oils These attack most plastics. In particular, the PVC lines become discolored and brittle. Measures: avoid contact with these liquids if possible, especially on the active surface. Parallel connection Parallel connection of proximity switches to implement logical functions is possible with 3-wire and 4-wire proximity switches without problem, but not with 2-wire proximity switches. Please note that: the power consumption increases. leakage currents add up so that an impermissible voltage drop may occur at the load even in the off state. See graphics, page 136. pnp connection The output stage contains a pnp transistor which connects the load to the positive operating voltage (+UB). The load is connected between the output and the negative operating voltage (0 V).
+UB Load A

RL
0V
NSD01050

Programming Selection of NO or NC function using slide switch in bottom part of enclosure or plug-in jumper in the electronics base. Only with certain cubic proximity switches. Reduction factors The specified operating distance s refers to exactly defined measuring conditions (see operating distance). Reduced oper-

2/142

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Usable operating distance su Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured under defined conditions (IEC). This includes the additionally expected deviations caused by the variations in temperature and operating voltage within the specified ranges. The usable operating distance is between 90% and 110% of the real operating distance. This results in the following for a reliable design: 0.81 sn < su < 1.21 sn Ensured operating distance (actuation distance) sa Distance from the active surface at which actuation of the proximity switch is ensured under defined conditions (IEC). The ensured operating distance is between zero and the bottom value of the useful operating distance: 0 < sa < 0.81 sn
120% 100% 80% Sensing face 0% BERO sn +10% +10% -10% -10% s r min s min s r max s max
sa s Ns n + 20%

It specifies the maximum permissible number of pulses per second at a constant pulse : Pause = 1 : 2 and half the rated operating distance sn. The measurement is carried out according to IEC 60947-5-2.
P roximity switch 2m m Non-conductive material sn / 2 T arget

Disc
NSD01052

W elding-resistant Sensors which can be used in strong magnetic fields, e.g. during arc welding, or in fields of electrolysis plants. The maximum permissible value is specified for specially selected sensors, e.g. U proximity switches. Lateral approach Lateral approach of the target is at right angles to the reference axis (IEC). Voltage drop A voltage drop (dependent on the current) occurs across the output transistor in the conductive state; the output voltage does not quite reach the associated operating voltage (to be particularly observed with a series connection and electronic inputs). Current consumption The current input is understood to be the current consumption of the proximity switch required to operate the oscillator, amplifier etc. It does not include the current flowing through the load. The no-load current I0 is the current drawn from the power supply without a load being connected. Temperature drift The specified operating distances refer to an ambient temperature of 20 C. Within the permissible temperature range of -25 to +70 C, the operating distance varies by max. 10% compared to the value at 20 C. The temperature of the target alone has practically no influence on the operating distance. Repeat accuracy R The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance sr at defined conditions (IEC). The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 23 C ( 5 C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. The difference between any two measurements must not exceed 10% of the real operating distance sr. The repeat accuracy is usually far better in the case of measurements immediately following one another.

NSD01063

sa sn sr smin smax

Actuation distance Rated operating distance Real operating distance Min. usable operating distance su (= actuation distance sa) max. usable operating distance su

Switching element function NO function An NO function results in a flow of load current when the target is sensed, and no flow of the load current when the target is not sensed (IEC). NC function An NC function results in no flow of load current when the target is sensed, and a flow of load current when the target is not sensed (IEC). Switching frequency f Number of switching operations of a proximity switch within a defined time interval (IEC). The switching frequency is the maximum possible switching rate between the damped and non-damped statuses at which the output circuit still delivers a defined signal sequence corresponding to the activation.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/143

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

Type SIMA TIC PX I200 0.6 mm 0.8 mm 1 mm 1.5 mm 2 mm 2,5 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm SIMA TIC PX I300 0.6 mm 1 mm 2 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 15 mm 20 mm 22 mm 25 mm 30 mm 35 mm 40 mm 30/40 mm 25/40 mm (switchable) 50 mm 65 mm SIMA TIC PX I400 1.5 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 15 mm 20 mm 25 mm 35 mm 40 mm 75 mm SIMA TIC PX I600 2 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 15 mm 35 mm SIMA TIC PX I900 3 mm 0 - 6 mm

Cylindrical forms 3 mm 4 mm 2/152 2/153

M5

6,5 mm

M8

8 mm

M12

12 mm

M14 see page

2/153 2/156 2/163 2/154, 2/155 2/157, 2/158 2/157 2/159, 2/160 2/163 2/167, 2/167 2/169 2/164, 2/165

see page 2/181 2/181 2/181 2/184 2/186 2/187 2/183, 2/183 2/183 2/185 2/191 - 2/192 2/190 2/193 2/196 2/196 2/203

2/186 2/187

see page 2/224 2/225 2/226 2/228

see page 2/236 2/236

see page 2/240 2/241

2/144

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

M18

18 mm

M30

30 mm

Cub ical forms (mm) 5x5 8x8

12 x 32

12 x 40

40 x 40

60 x 80

80 x 100

80 x 80

2/153 2/157 2/161 2/161, 2/162 2/167 2/170, 2/170 2/169 2/171, 2/172 2/173, 2/174 2/175, 2/175 2/176, 2/177 2/178, 2/179 2/180 2/180

2/188 2/194, 2/195 2/195 2/198 - 2/200 2/198 2/202, 2/202 2/202 2/203 2/204 - 2/204 2/207 2/211 2/213 2/214 2/216 2/217 2/221 2/222 2/223 2/223 2/215 2/218 2/219 2/205, 2/206 2/212 - 2/212

2/220

2/227 2/229 2/230 2/231 2/232 2/233 2/234 2/234 2/235

2/237 2/237 2/238 2/238 2/239 2/239

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/145

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

S IM A T IC P X I20 0

2
Typ e ,
Operating distance 0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.)

3 m m

4 m m

M 5

5 m m x 5 m m

M 8

6 .5 m m

8 m m x 8 m m

M 12

1 2m m x 40 m m

1 2m m x 3 2m m

0.6 mm

0.8 mm

0.8 mm

0.8 mm 1 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 1.5 mm 2 mm 4 mm 2 mm 4 mm 2 mm

5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI.4.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI.5.) 50 ... 75 mm (PXI.6.) Output NO contact / NC contact pnp / npn Analog Number of wires Operating voltage 10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC W iring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment Degree of protection IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K See page 2/152 2/153 2/153 2/153 from 2/154 from 2/156 2/157 from 2/159 2/161 2/161

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
2, 3, 4

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
2, 3, 4

/ /
3, 4

/ /
4

/ /

/ /

/ /

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/146

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

SIMATIC PXI200

2
Type,
Operating distance 0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.) 5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI.4.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI.5.) 50 ... 75 mm (PXI.6.) Output NO contact / NC contact pnp / npn Analog Number of wires Operating voltage 10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment Degree of protection IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K See page 2/164 from 2/170 2/169 from 2/173 from 2/176 2/180 2/180

Cu b e w it h M14

M18

18 mm

M30

40 mm x 40 mm

60 mm x 80 mm

80 mm x 100 mm

2.5 mm 5 mm 5 mm 8 mm 5 mm 10 mm 15 mm 15 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm

/ /
2, 3, 4

/ /
2, 3, 4

/ /
3

/ /
2, 3, 4

/ /
2, 3, 4

/ /
4

/ /
4

/ / /

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/147

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

SIMATIC PXI300

2
Type,
Operating distance 0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.)

4 mm

M5

M8

M12

Cube with M14

6.5 mm

8 mm x 8 mm

M18

0.6 mm

0.6 mm 1 mm 2 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm 6 mm 2 mm 4 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm 3 mm

5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI.4.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI.5.) 50 ... 75 mm (PXI.6.) Output NO contact / NC contact pnp / npn Analog Number of wires Operating voltage 10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment Degree of protection IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K See page

6 mm 10 mm

5 mm

5 mm 8 mm 12 mm 20 mm

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
2, 3

/ /
2, 3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
2, 3

/ /
from 2/181

/ /
from 2/183

/
2/185, 2/193

/ /
from 2/194

/
2/188

/ /
from 2/187

/
2/181

/
2/181

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/148

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

SIMATIC PXI300

2
Type,
Operating distance 0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.) 5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI.4.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI.5.)

18 mm

M30

40 mm x 40 mm

60 mm x 80 mm

80 mm x 100 mm

5 mm 8 mm

10 mm 15 mm 22 mm 40 mm 15 mm 20 mm 25 mm 30 mm 35 mm 40 mm 30 mm 30 mm 40 mm

50 ... 75 mm (PXI.6.) Output NO contact / NC contact pnp / npn Analog Number of wires Operating voltage 10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment Degree of protection IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K See page

50 mm

65 mm

/ /
3

/ /
2, 3

/ /
2, 3, 4

/ /
2, 3

/ /
2, 3

/ /
from 2/202

/ /
from 2/205

/
from 2/215

/
from 2/219

/
from 2/195

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/149

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

SIMATIC PXI400

2
Type,
Operating distance 0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.) 5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI.4.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI.5.)

M8

M12

M18

M30

40 mm x 40 mm

80 mm x 80 mm

1.5 mm 4 mm

3 mm 8 mm 5 mm 12 mm 10 mm 20 mm 15 mm 25 mm 35 mm 40 mm 75 mm

50 ... 75 mm (PXI.6.) Output NO contact / NC contact pnp / npn Analog Number of wires Operating voltage 10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment Degree of protection IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K See page

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
3

/ /
from 2/225

/ /
from 2/227

/ /
from 2/229

/ /
from 2/231 2/235

/
from 2/224

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

2/150

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


Introduction

SIMATIC PXI600

SIMATIC PXI9 00

2
Type,
Operating distance 0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.) 5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ...22 mm (PXI.4.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI.5.) 50 ... 75 mm (PXI.6.) Output NO contact / NC contact pnp / npn Analog Number of wires Operating voltage 10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC Wiring M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment Degree of protection IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K V ersion for hazardous area Zone 2 See page

M12

M18

M30

40 mm x 40 mm

M14

M12

2 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 15 mm 15 mm 35 mm

3 mm 0 ... 6 mm

/ /
4

/ /
4

/ /
4

/ /
4

/ /
3 4

/
2/236

/
2/237

/
2/238

/ /
2/239 2/240

2/241

Configurator in the Internet for fast product selection and ordering available under www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/151

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 0.6 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal R ated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire 3 mm, mini Flush 0.6 mm Stainless steel V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 100 Hz 5000 mm 0.01 ms 10 Y ellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 Connector type Order No. 3 0.055 mm2 3R G 46 032AB 00

With 2 m cable, PU R
NO contact, pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A 4,5 6 B 1,5 A B

3RG46 032AB00
3 16

22

2/152

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00298

LED

NSD00302

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 0.8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f R e p e a t a c c u ra c y R P o w e r-u p d e la y tv S w itc h in g s ta tu s d is p la y P re c a u tio n s S p u rio u s s ig n a l s u p p re s s io n S h o rt-c irc u it a n d o ve rlo a d w ith s ta n d c a p a b ility R e ve rs e -p o la rity p ro te c tio n W ire -b re a k p ro te c tio n In d u c tive in te rfe re n c e p ro te c tio n R a d io in te rfe re n c e p ro te c tio n D e g re e o f p ro te c tio n Standard duty 3-wire 5 mm 5 mm, mini Flush 0.8 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 200 Hz 5 0 0 0 m m 0 .0 1 m s 10 Y e llo w L E D IP 6 7 Standard duty 3-wire 4 mm, mini Flush 0.8 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 5000 0 .0 1 8 Y e llo w L E D IP 6 7 Standard duty 3-wire M5, mini Flush 0.8 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 5000 0 .0 1 10 Y e llo w L E D IP 6 7

I Selection and Ordering data


S w itc h in g o u tp u t C k t. d ia g . N o. 11 13 2 4 A ,C A ,C C onnecto r ty p e O rd e r N o . 3 0 .1 4 m m 2 3RG 42 360A G 00 3RG 46 360G B 00 O rd e r N o . 3 0 .1 4 m m 2 3RG 42 001A B 00 3RG 42 007A B 00 O rd e r N o . 3 0 .1 4 m m 2 3RG 42 100A G 00 3RG 46 100G B 00 3RG 42 107A G 00 3RG 46 107G B 00

With 2 m cable, PUR


N O c o n ta c t, p n p N O c o n ta c t, n p n N O c o n ta c t, p n p N O c o n ta c t, n p n

With 8 mm co mbin atio n p lu g

I Dimensions
M o u n tin g in stru ctio n s D im e n s io n d e p e n d in g o n fo rm A = a c tive s u rfa c e B = m e ta l-fre e a re a
A 3,3 5 B 2 ,4
A 6 8 B 2 ,4

3,3 A

B 2 ,4

NSD00304

B
1,5

3 R G 4 2 3 6 0 A G 0 0
5,5
5x 5

3R G 4200 1A B 00

3R G 4200 7A B 00
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 1 6 1

3 R G 4 2 1 0 0 ..0 0 3 R G 4 6 1 0 0 ..0 0
M 5x 0,5

3 R G 4 2 1 0 7 ..0 0 3 R G 4 6 1 0 7 ..0 0
M 5x 0,5
18

4 18
3 2

25 3

14

18 20

25

25

23

NSD0_00306a

NSD0_0311a

NSD00310

NSD00308

15

M 1,6
NSD00307

LE D
M 8 x 1

, 5

SW 7 LE D

6,5

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/153

NSD00309

LE D Sg

SW 7

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 1 mm

I Technical specifications
C lass N umber of conductors D esign I nstallation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 S tandard duty 3-w ire M8 F lush 1 mm Stainless steel V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V ); 30 (34 V ) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 1500 mm 0.1 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 S tandard duty 4-w ire M8 F lush 1 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 1 50 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

Rated operational current Ie Switching freq uency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

I S election and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 110AG00 3RG40 110AF 00 3RG40 110GB00 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 110C C 00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn

NO and NC contacts, 10 pnp

With 8 mm combination plug


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp 2 3 A, C A B 3RG40 117AG00 3RG40 117AF 00 3RG40 117C C 00

NO and NC contacts, 1 pnp

With M12 connector


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn 2 3 4 E, F F E, F F 3RG40 113AG00 3RG40 113AF 00 3RG40 113GB00 3RG40 113C C 00

NO and NC contacts, 4 pnp

I D imensions
Mounting instructions
4 A
50

3RG40 110..00
M 8x1 34 SW 13

3RG40 117..00
M 8x1 34 SW 13 4

3RG40 113..00
M 8x1

12

B 3

52

NSD00314b

55

LED

NSD00319

LED
NSD00313

LED Sg

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/ 154

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 13

34

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 1 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Standard duty (PL C) 2-wire M8 Flush 1 mm Stainless steel 15 ... 34 1.5 25 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 15 7 6 A E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 110JB00 3RG40 117JB00 3RG40 113JB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact NO contact NO contact

With 8 mm combination plug With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
4 A
50

3RG40 110J B00 3RG40 117J B00 3RG40 113J B00


M 8x1 34 SW 13

12

B 3

M 8x1 34 SW 13 4

M 8x1

52

NSD00314b

55

LED

NSD00319

LED
NSD00313

LED Sg

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 13

34

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/155

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 1.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm, mini Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 200 Hz 3000 mm 0.02 ms 10 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm, Shorty Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 A A A A Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.14 mm2 3RG42 011AB00 3RG42 017AG00 3RG46 017GB00 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 500AG33 3RG40 500AF33 3RG40 500GB33 3RG40 500GA33 3RG40 507AG33 3RG40 507AF33 3RG40 507GB33 3RG40 507GA33 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 500AG05 3RG40 500AF05 3RG40 500GB05 3RG40 500GA05 3RG40 507AG05 3RG40 507AF05 3RG40 507GB05 3RG40 507GA05

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

With 8 mm combination plug

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG42 01, 3RG46 01-7
4 A 13 B 4,5

3RG42 01 1AB00 6,5

3RG42 017..00 3RG46 017..00 6,5

3RG40 500..33
6,5

3RG40 507..33
6,5

3RG40 500..05
6,5

3RG40 507..05
6,5

16

35

33

20

34

29

45

50

34 LED
NSD00336

NSD00328

LED

NSD00332

NSD00326

LED (4x) Sg NSD00329

LED

LED

NSD00327

LED (4x) Sg
NSD00335

M 8x1

3RG40 50
4 A 12 B 3

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/156

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00319

52

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 1.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire M8, mini Flush 1.5 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 200 Hz 3000 mm 0.01 ms 10 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire 8 mm, Shorty Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire 8 mm 8 mm Flush 1.5 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 1000 0.07 10 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 A A A A Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.14 mm2 3RG42 110AG31 3RG42 117AG31 3RG42 117AF31 3RG46 117GB31 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 510AG33 3RG40 510AF33 3RG40 510GB33 3RG40 510GA33 3RG40 517AG33 3RG40 517AF33 3RG40 517GB33 3RG40 517GA33 Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 3RG42 370AB00 3RG46 370GG00 3RG42 377AB00 3RG42 377AA00 3RG46 377GG00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

With 8 mm combination plug

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG42 11, 3RG46 11, 3RG40 51
4 A 12 B 3

3RG42 11 0AG31

3RG42 117..31 3RG46 117..31 M 8x1

3RG40 510..33
8

3RG40 517..33
8

3RG42 370..00, 3RG46 370..00


8x8
5

3
10

M 8x1 SW 13 16

SW 13

35

45

33

40 37

29 17

NSD00319

NSD00351

LED

NSD00352

NSD00338

NSD00333a

LED
NSD00339b

LED Sg

LED (4x) Sg

M3 LED

3RG42 377..00, 3RG46 377..00


8x8 3

4 A

12

50 37

59

NSD00337

LED
Sg

M3

NSD00334a

A = active surface B = metal-free area

20

10

3RG42 37, 3RG46 37

20

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/157

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 1.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire M8, Shorty Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 1500 mm 0.1 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire M8 Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 4-wire M8 Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 1.0 50 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 110AG33 3RG40 110AF33 3RG40 110GB33 3RG40 110GA33 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 110AG05 3RG40 110AF05 3RG40 110GB05 3RG40 110GA05 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 110CC05

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

NO and NC contacts, 10 pnp

With 8 mm combination plug


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn 2 3 4 5 A A A A 3RG40 117AG33 3RG40 117AF33 3RG40 117GB33 3RG40 117GA33 3RG40 117AG05 3RG40 117AF05 3RG40 117CC05

NO and NC contacts, 1 pnp

With M12 connector


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn 2 3 4 5 E, F F E, F F F 3RG40 113AG05 3RG40 113AF05 3RG40 113GB05 3RG40 113GA05 3RG40 113CC05

NO and NC contacts, 1 pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
4 A 12 B 3

3RG40 110..33
M 8x1 SW 13

3RG40 117..33
M 8x1

3RG40 110..05
M 8x1
34 SW 13

3RG40 117..05
M 8x1 34 SW 13 4

3RG40 113..05
M 8x1

SW 13

45 33

35

50

52

NSD0_00340a

NSD00319

LED

NSD0_00341c

LED (4x) Sg

NSD00314b

55

LED

LED
NSD00313

LED Sg

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/158

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 13

34

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 2 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection T ype Standard duty 3-wire M12, Shorty Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 1200 mm 0.1 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 12.A.33 3RG40 12.G.33 Standard duty 4-wire M12, Shorty Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 1.0 50 800 0.1 3 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 120CD10 3RG40 123CD11 Standard duty 3-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 12.A.01 3RG40 12.G.00 Standard duty 4-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 120CD00 3RG40 123CD00

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 120AG33 3RG40 120AF33 3RG40 120GB33 3RG40 120GA33 4 0.14 mm2 NO and NC contacts, 10 pnp 3RG40 120CD10 3-wire E, F F E, F F F 3RG40 123AG33 3RG40 123AF33 3RG40 123GB33 3RG40 123GA33 4-wire NO and NC contacts, 1 pnp 3RG40 123CD11 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 120AG01 3RG40 120AF01 3RG40 120GB00 3RG40 120GA00 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 120CD00 3-wire 3RG40 123AG01 3RG40 123AF01 3RG40 123GB00 4-wire 3RG40 123CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

With M12 connector


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn 2 3 4 5

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
6 A 12 B 5

3RG40 120..33
M 12x1

3RG40 120CD10
M 12x1

3RG40 120..00 3RG40 120..01


M 12x1

3RG40 123..00 3RG40 123..01


M 12x1

35

40

SW 17

4 59
NSD00361b

SW 17

NSD00363

NSD00366

NSD00373

LED
NSD00360a

LED

SW 17

3RG40 123..33
M 12x1
B

3RG40 123CD11
M 12x1

LED

NSD00367b

SW 17 LED (4x) Sg

50

NSD00374

SW 17 LED Sg

29,5

45

34

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 17
LED (4x) Sg

50

48

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/159

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 2 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operating voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms M inimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 15 ... 34

mA 1.5 mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 25 2 700 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 15 6 E, F Connector type Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 120JB00 3RG40 123JB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact NO contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
6 12 B 5

3RG40 120JB00 3RG40 123JB00


M 12x1 4
M 12x1

4 59

NSD00363

SW 17

A
NSD00360a

NSD00361b

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/160

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 17
LED (4x) Sg

50

48

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 2 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire Cubic 12 mm 40 mm Flush 2 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 800 mm 0.2 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 4-wire Cubic 12 mm 32 mm Flush 2 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 1.0 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 700AG45 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 710CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO and NC contacts, 10 pnp

With 8 mm combination plug


NO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG40 707AG45

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
B A 6
LED 3,2x5

3RG40 700AG45
26 18 6 4 Se n s o r ce n te r 12 10 M3 32 40

3RG40 710CD00
27 12,6 8 2,4 13

16

NSD00378

3,2

32

2,6

NSD00376b

NSD00382

3RG40 707AG45
LED 3,2x5 26 18 6 Se n s o r ce n te r 4 M3 32 40 12 10 16

A = active surface B = metal-free area These prox imity switches can be mounted nex t to one another.

3,2
NSD0 00377b

M 1 8x

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/161

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 2 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overloadproof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Standard duty 3-wire Cubic 12 mm 40 mm Flush 2 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 4-wire Cubic 12 mm 40 mm Flush 2 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 10 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 700AG01 3RG40 700AF01 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 700CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp; LED q NO NO contact and NC contact, pnp; LED q NC NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp

With 8 mm combination plug


2 1 A A 3RG40 707AG01 3RG40 707CD01

3RG40 707CD02

With M12 connector


2 3 1 E, F F F 3RG40 703AG01 3RG40 703AF01 3RG40 703CD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
B A 6
4

3RG40 700..00, 3RG40 700..01


40 32 Sensor center 12

3RG40 703..00, 3RG40 703..01


Sensor center 4
4

40 32

12

NSD00379b

17

26

3,2
NSD00378

6,5 LED

36

6,5

17

26

3,2

Sg

LED

3RG40 707..01, 3RG40 707..02


Sensor center 4 4 40 32 12 10

A = active surface B = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another.

Sg

2/162

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00380

LED

6,5

34 26

17

3,2

NSD00381

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 2.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm Not flush 2.5 mm Stainless steel V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 9 00 mm 0.08 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire M8 Not flush 2.5 mm Stainless steel 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connector type Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 600AG33 3RG40 600AF33 B 3RG40 600GB33 B 3RG40 600GA33 A A A A 3RG40 607AG33 3RG40 607AF33 3RG40 607GB33 B 3RG40 607GA33 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 210AG33 3RG40 210AF33 3RG40 210GB33 3RG40 210GA33 3RG40 217AG33 3RG40 217AF33 3RG40 217GB33 3RG40 217GA33

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp 11 NC contact, pnp 12 NO contact, npn 13 NC contact, npn 14

With 8 mm combination plug


NO contact, pnp 2 NC contact, pnp 3 NO contact, npn 4 NC contact, npn 5

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR9 9

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
10 A 6
NSD00391

3RG40 600..33
6,5

3RG40 607..33

3RG40 210..33
M 8x1 SW 13

3RG40 217..33
M 8x1

20

B 8

6,5
35 4

33

NSD00386

NSD00388

45

LED

LED
NSD00389a

LED (4x)
Sg
NSD00387

A = active surface B = metal-free area

4 SW 13
LED (4x)
Sg

35 4

45 33

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/163

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 2.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 800 mm 0.1 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 4-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 13 14 10 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 720GB00 3RG40 720GA00 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 720CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp

With M12 connector


4 5 1 E, F F F 3RG40 723GB00 3RG40 723GA00 3RG40 723CD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
B A 7 6
23

3RG40 720..00
M 14x1

3RG40 723..00
M 14x1

Plan view:
NSD00400

20

23

20

NSD00402a

6x3,5 3,5

56

27

20 5,5
NSD00398a

NSD00399a

5,5 LED

LED

Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another.

2/164

Siemens FS 10 2008

66

6x3,5 3,5

20

56

12

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 2.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm Molded plastic V V 15 ... 34

mA 1.5 mA mA 25 mA mA Hz mm ms 2 800 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 15 6 E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 720JB00 3RG40 723JB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact NO contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
B A 7 6
23

3RG40 720..00
M 14x1

20
20 5,5
NSD00398a

NSD00402a

6x3,5 3,5

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another.

56

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/165

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type V mA mA Hz mm ms Standard duty 3-wire M12, Shorty Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 22.A.33 3RG40 22.G.33 Standard duty 4-wire M12, Shorty Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 1.0 50 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 220CD10 3RG40 223CD11 Standard duty 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 22.A.01 3RG40 22.G.00 Standard duty 4-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 220CD00 3RG40 223CD00

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 10 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220AG33 3RG40 220AF33 3RG40 220GB33 3RG40 220GA33 4 0.14 mm2 NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp 3RG40 220CD10 3-wire 3RG40 223AG33 3RG40 223AF33 3RG40 223GB33 3RG40 223GA33 4-wire 1 F 3RG40 223CD11 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220AG01 3RG40 220AF01 3RG40 220GB00 3RG40 220GA00 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 220CD00 3-wire 3RG40 223AG01 3RG40 223AF01 3RG40 223GB00 3RG40 223GA00 4-wire 3RG40 223CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

With M12 connector


2 3 4 5 E, F F E, F F

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
15 A 9 27 B
6,5

3RG40 220..33
M 12x1

3RG40 220CD10
M 12x1 6,5

3RG40 220..00 3RG40 220..01


M 12x1

3RG40 223..00 3RG40 223..01


M 12x1 6,5

35

6,5

40

4 65
NSD0_00421a

SW 17

SW 17

56

NSD0_00427a

NSD00423

NSD0_00444a

NSD0_00420a

LED

LED

SW 17

LED

LED (4x) Sg

3RG40 223..33
B
M 12x1
4 SW 17 34

3RG40 223CD11
M 12x1

50 6,5

NSD00428

LED (4x) Sg
NSD0_00448c

LED (4x) Sg

2/166

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 17 39

A = active surface B = metal-free area


45 6,5

SW 17

54

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire Cubic 12 mm 40 mm Not flush 4 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 800 mm 0.2 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 1.5 (24 V) 25 2 300 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. Connec- Order No. diag. No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG40 800AG45 3RG40 220JB00 A E, F 3RG40 807AG45 3RG40 223JB00 11 15 2 6 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact NO contact, pnp NO contact

With 8 mm combination plug With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG40 80-.AG45
15 A 9 27 B 8

3RG40 800AG45
LED 3,2x5 26 18 6 4 Sensor center 12 10 M3 32 40

3RG40 220JB00
M 12x1 6,5

16

NSD01073

NSD00376b

NSD0_00420a

3RG40 807AG45
LED 3,2x5 6 26 18 Sensor center 4 M3 32 40 12 10

LED

3RG40 223JB00
M 12x1 6,5

3RG40 22-.JB00
15 A 9 27 B 8
3,2

16

4 65
NSD0_00421a

SW 17
LED (4x) Sg SW 17 54

3,2

NSD0 00377b

A = active surface B = metal-free area

NSD00423

These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another.

56

M 1 8x

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/167

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire M18, Shorty Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 800 mm 0.15 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 4-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 10 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 130AG33 3RG40 130AF33 3RG40 130GB33 3RG40 130GA33 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 130AG01 3RG40 130AF01 3RG40 130GB00 3RG40 130GA00 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 130CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp

With M12 connector


2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F 3RG40 133AG33 3RG40 133AF33 3RG40 133GB33 3RG40 133GA33 3RG40 133AG01 3RG40 133AF01 3RG40 133GB00 3RG40 133GA00 3RG40 133CD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
11 A 30 B 10

3RG40 130..33
M 18x1 4

3RG40 133..33
M 18x1 4

3RG40 130..00 3RG40 130..01


M 18x1

3RG40 133..00 3RG40 133..01

45 31

SW 24 34

35

NSD00451

SW 24

NSD0_00456b

NSD00447

LED

M 12x1

NSD00445

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/168

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 24

LED (4x)

54

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Standard duty 3-wire 18 mm (button) Flush 5 mm (3.2 mm) Molded plastic 10 ... 30 1.5 50 100 0.15 1.0 IP67 Standard duty 4-wire M14 Not flush 5 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 10 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 820CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp

With M12 connector


1 F 3RG40 823CD00

With single conductors, 0.5 m, 3 0.25 mm2 PV C


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn 11 12 13 3RG40 750AJ00 3RG40 750AH 00 3RG40 750GJ00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG40 82
20 A 12 40 B 15

3RG40 75
18 15,95 9,9 3,85

3RG40 820..00
M 14x1

3RG40 823..00
M 14x1

Plan view:
NSD00400

20

23

23

20

12

NSD00464

56

27

NSD00475a

5,5
NSD00398a

NSD00399a

5,5 LED

Mounting instructions
15 30 B 10

LED

Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area


A
NSD 00467

3RG40 750GJ00 also possible with non-embedding mounting: Rated operating distance sn = 3.2 mm

66

6x3,5 3,5

20

6x3,5 3,5

20

56

12

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/169

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 15 ... 34

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 1.5 mA mA 25 mA mA Hz mm ms 2 400 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 15 6 E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 130JB00 3RG40 133JB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact NO contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
11 A 30 B 10

3RG40 130..00 3RG40 130..01


M 18x1

3RG40 133..00 3RG40 133..01


M 18x1
4

NSD00451

54

SW 24

NSD00446b

NSD00445

LED
M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/170

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 24 58,5

69 55

LED (4x)

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire M18, Shorty Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 500 mm 0.2 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 500 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 4-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 500 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 10 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230AG33 3RG40 230AF33 3RG40 230GB33 3RG40 230GA33 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230AG01 3RG40 230AF01 3RG40 230GB00 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 230CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp

With M12 connector


2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F 3RG40 233AG33 3RG40 233AF33 3RG40 233GB33 3RG40 233GA33 3RG40 233AG01 3RG40 233AF01 3RG40 233GB00 3RG40 233CD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG40 23...33
20 A 11 28 B

3RG40 230..33 3RG40 233..33


M 18x1 4
M 18x1 4

3RG40 230..00 3RG40 230..01


M 18x1

3RG40 233..00 3RG40 233..01


M 18x1 4

45 31 10,5

35 10,5

SW 24 34

15

15

54 10,5

69 55 10,5

NSD0_00502a

NSD0_00503b

NSD00500

LED

M 12x1
NSD00493

SW 24

LED (4x)

LED

NSD00494b

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)

SW 24

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/171

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 15 ... 34

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type

mA 1.5 mA mA 25 mA mA Hz mm ms 2 200 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 23.JB00

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 15 16 17 2 3 6 8 9 E, F F E, F E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230JB00 3RG40 233JB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
20 A 11 28 B 15

3RG40 220..00
M 18x1

3RG40 223..00
M 18x1 4

15

54 10,5

69 55 10,5

NSD00500

NSD00493

LED
NSD00494b

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/172

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)

SW 24

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 10 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 R a ted o p era tio n a l c u rren t Ie S w itc h in g freq u en c y f R ep ea t a c c u ra c y R P o w er-u p d ela y tv S w itc h in g s ta tu s d is p la y P rec a u tio n s S p u rio u s s ig n a l s u p p res s io n S h o rt-c irc u it-p ro o f/o verlo a d -p ro o f R evers e-p o la rity p ro tec tio n W ire-b rea k p ro tec tio n In d u c tive in terferen c e p ro tec tio n R a d io in terferen c e p ro tec tio n D eg ree o f p ro tec tio n Standard duty 3-wire M30, Shorty Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 3 0 (3 4 V) m A 20 0 ( 5 0 C ); 15 0 ( 8 5 C ) H z 300 m m 0 .3 m s 40 Y ello w L E D IP 6 7 Standard duty 3-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 3 0 (3 4 V) 20 0 ( 5 0 C ); 15 0 ( 8 5 C ) 300 0 .3 40 Y ello w L E D IP 6 7 Standard duty 4-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (3 4 V) 20 0 ( 5 0 C ); 15 0 ( 8 5 C ) 300 0 .3 40 Y ello w L E D IP 6 7

I Selection and Ordering data


S w itc h in g o u tp u t C k t. d ia g . N o. 11 12 13 14 10 C o n n ec - O rd er N o . to r ty p e 3 0 .25 m m 2 3RG 40 140A G 33 3RG 40 140A F 33 3RG 40 140G B 33 3RG 40 140G A 33 O rd er N o . 3 0 .25 m m 2 3RG 40 140A G 01 3RG 40 140A F 01 3RG 40 140G B 00 O rd er N o .
2

With 2 m cable, PUR


N O c o n ta c t, p n p N C c o n ta c t, p n p N O c o n ta c t, n p n N C c o n ta c t, n p n N O c o n ta c t a n d N C c o n ta c t, p n p N O c o n ta c t, p n p N C c o n ta c t, p n p N O c o n ta c t, n p n N C c o n ta c t, n p n N O c o n ta c t a n d N C c o n ta c t, p n p

4 0 .14 m m

3RG 40 140C D 00

With M 12 co n n ecto r
2 3 4 5 1 E,F F E,F F F 3RG 40 143A G 33 3RG 40 143A F 33 3RG 40 143G B 33 3RG 40 143G A 33 3RG 40 143A G 01 3RG 40 143A F 01 3RG 40 143G B 00 3RG 40 143C D 00

I Dimensions
M o u n tin g in stru ctio n s 3 R G 40 14 ...3 3
25 37 B

3 R G 40 14 0 ..3 3
M 3 0 x 1 ,5 5

3 R G 40 14 3 ..3 3
M 3 0 x 1 ,5 5

3 R G 40 14 0 ..0 0 3 R G 40 14 0 ..0 1
M 3 0 x 1 ,5

3 R G 40 14 3 ..0 0 3 R G 40 14 3 ..0 1
M 3 0 x 1 ,5 5
N S D 0 0 51 9

45 31

35

16

S W 36

N S D 0 _ 0 0 52 3 b

N S D 0 0 52 1

N S D 0 _ 0 0 52 4 b

S W 36

LE D (4 x )

LE D

A = a c tive s u rfa c e B = m eta l-free a rea

N S D 0 0 51 8 a

M 12x1

L E D (4 x ) Sg

LE D

S W 36 58 ,5

69 55

S W 36 34

54

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/173

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 10 mm

I Technical specifications
Class N umber of conductors Design I nstallation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC S tandard duty (PL C) 2-w ire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 15 ... 34 S tandard duty 4-w ire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 15 300 300 0.3 40 IP67

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms M inimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 1.5 mA mA 25 mA mA Hz mm ms 2 300 0.3 40 Yellow LED IP67

I S election and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 15 6 E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 140JB00 3RG40 143JB00 3RG40 143CD01 Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact NO contact

With M12 connector


NO contact and NC 1 contact, pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
25 37 B 16

3RG40 140J B00


M 30x1,5
5

3RG40 143J B00


M 30x1,5

3RG40 143CD01
M 30 1,5

SW 36 58,5

69 55

54

80 70

NSD00521

NSD00518a

NSD00519

LED

LED (4x) Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/ 174

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD0_00528

SW 36

M 12 1

SW 36

50

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire M30, Shorty Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 300 mm 0.4 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 3-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP67 Standard duty 4-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 10 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240AG33 3RG40 240AF33 3RG40 240GB33 3RG40 240GA33 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240AG01 3RG40 240AF01 3RG40 240GB00 3RG40 240GA00 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 240CD00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp

With M12 connector


2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F 3RG40 243AG33 3RG40 243AF33 3RG40 243GB33 3RG40 243GA33 3RG40 243AG01 3RG40 243AF01 3RG40 243GB00 3RG40 243CD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
30 A 15 80 B 25
16

3RG40 240..33 3RG40 243..33


M 30x1,5
M 30x1,5

3RG40 240..00 3RG40 240..01


M 30x1,5

3RG40 243..00 3RG40 243..01


M 30x1,5

SW 36

31 16

15

35

35

16

16

45

5
LED (4x) M 12x1

NSD0_00551a

NSD00548

M 12x1
NSD0_00544b

SW 36

LED

NSD0_00552b

NSD00545b

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 36

SW 36 LED (4x)

69

58,5

54

55

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/175

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 100 mm 0.75 ms 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65 Standard duty 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65 Standard duty 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 50 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 1 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No. Order No.

With M12 connector, rotatable


NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, npn NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp F F 3RG40 383CD00 3RG40 383GD00

With terminal box


19 20 21 18 3RG40 316AG01 3RG40 316AF01 3RG40 316GB00 3RG40 316CD00

D esi g n fo r M erced es B en z
18 3RG40 346CD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
25 A 75 B
4

3RG40 316..0.
0 4 0

3RG40 346..00
40
45 40

3RG40 383..00
40
LED 40 46 55
NSD 01163

30

A
G 3 0

E N 7 , 3

NSD0_00570a

60

NSD 01164

D
4 a

118

5
0 2

, 3

5,3 LED YE LED G N 7,35,3 30 14

, 3 1 4 M

, 5

M 201,5

30 40

5,3x7,3

M 12x1 40

A = active surface B = metal-free area

T he active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

T he active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor.

T he active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.

2/176

Siemens FS 10 2008

69

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 15 ... 34 Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 1.5 25 2 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP65

mA 1.5 mA mA 25 mA mA Hz mm ms 2 180 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 15 6 22 E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240JB00 3RG40 243JB00 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 316JB00 Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact NO contact NO contact

With M12 connector With terminal box

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG40 240..00 3RG40 243..00
30 A 15 80 B
16

3RG40 240..00 3RG40 243..00


M 30x1,5 M 30x1,5

Mounting instructions 3RG40 316JB00


25 75 B
30

3RG40 316JB00
40
45 40

40

25

16

A
69 58,5 55 SW 36

54

120

15

5,3
60

NSD00548

NSD0_00544b

SW 36

NSD 01164

LED YE 7,3 5,3 14

LED

NSD00545b

LED (4x)

30
B

M 201,5

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

A = active surface B = metal-free area

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

NSD0_00560a

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/177

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 20 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 75 mm 0.75 ms 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65 Standard duty 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 75 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 19 20 21 18 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No.

With terminal box


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp 3RG40 416AG01 3RG40 416AF01 3RG40 416GB00 3RG40 416CD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
70 A 50 100 B
4

3RG40 416..0.
0 4 0

40

40

5
0

, 3 D

NSD00583

Y L G

E E

1 0

E N 7 , 3

, 3 1 4 M

, 5

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/178

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 20 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm Molded plastic V V 15 ... 34

mA 1.5 mA mA 25 mA mA Hz mm ms 2 75 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 22 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 416JB00

With terminal box


NO contact

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
70 A 50 100 B
40
45

3RG40 416JB00
40
40

40

40

120

5,3
60

LED YE 7,3 5,3 14

30

M 201,5

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

A = active surface B = metal-free area

NSD0_00560a

NSD00583

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/179

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distances 30 and 40 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Standard duty 4-wire Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Not flush 30 mm Molded plastic V V 15 ... 34 Standard duty 4-wire Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Not flush 40 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 10 1.0 200 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) mA mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) mA mA Hz mm ms 50 1.0 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. Connec- Order No. diag. No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 426CD00 18 Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 436CD00

With terminal box


NO contact and NC contact, pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG40 426CD00
90 A 60 210 B 90
, 5

3RG40 426CD00
6 4 0 M 5 2 0 x 1 , 5

3RG40 436CD00
80,3 65 LED YE LED GN 27,5 P g 13,5
NSD00625

L Y L G E

E E D N

40

NSD00608

A
5

, 3 4 1

100 65

5,3 41,5

3RG40 436CD00
80 A 15 160 B 90
NSD00613

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/180

Siemens FS 10 2008

40

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distances 0.6 and 1 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 3-wire 4 mm, mini Flush 0.6 mm Stainless steel V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 200 Hz 3000 mm 0.01 ms 8 IP68 IP68 3-wire M5, mini Flush 0.6 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 3000 0.01 8 IP68 E xtra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M8 Flush 1 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 65 10 200 5000 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 2 3 2 3 A A E, F F Connector type Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 3RG46 000AG02 Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 3RG46 100AG02 Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 3RG40 110AB00 3RG40 110AA00 3RG40 117AB00 3RG40 117AA00 3RG40 113AB00 3RG40 113AA00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp

With 8 mm combination plug

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A 6 8 B
2,4

2 A

B
2,4

4 A

12

B 3

NSD0_00305

NSD00304

3RG46 000AG02
4

3RG46 100AG02
M 5x0,5 20 SW 7

3RG40 11 0A.00
M 8x1

3RG40 11 7A.00
M 8x1 4 41 SW 13

NSD00319

3RG40 11 3A.00
M 8x1 41 SW 13 LED Sg

SW 13 41

25

25

57

58

NSD00300

NSD00299

NSD0_00320a

LED
NSD0_00321a

LED Sg
NSD00322

62

38

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/181

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 2 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 200 1800 5 25/1200 (AC/DC) 0.04 100 Yellow LED IP67

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 1200 (NO contact), 4000 (NC contact) 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 16 17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F Connector type Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 120AB00 3RG40 120AA00 3RG40 123AB00 3RG40 123AA00 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 120K B00 3RG40 120K A00 3RG40 123K B00 3RG40 123K A00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
6 A 12 B 6

3RG40 120A.00
M 12x1 4

3RG40 123A.00
M 12x1 4

3RG40 120K .00


M 12x1 4

3RG40 123K .00


M 12x1 4
NSD00365

SW 17 54

SW 17

SW 17

NSD00368

NSD00364

LED

NSD00364

NSD00365

LED (4x) Sg

LED

LED (4x) Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/182

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 17 54

56

65

56

65

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 2 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 12 mm Flush 2 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 520AG30 3RG40 520AF30 3RG40 520GB30 3RG40 520GA30 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 120AG30 3RG40 120AF30 3RG40 120GB30 3RG40 120GA30 Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 120AG31 3RG40 120GB31

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
6 A 12 B 5

3RG40 520..30
12

3RG40 120..30
M 12x1

3RG40 120..31
M 12x1

50

50

SW 17

50

NSD00363

NSD00360a

LED

NSD00360a

NSD00372

LED

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 17

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/183

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 2 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Greater rated operating distance 3-wire M8, Shorty Flush 2 mm Stainless steel V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 600 mm 0.1 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Greater rated operating distance 3-wire M8 Flush 2 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 600 (bei 3AG22: 1000) 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 2 2 A A A A E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG41 110AG33 3RG41 110AF33 3RG41 110GB33 3RG41 110GA33 3RG41 117AG33 3RG41 117AF33 3RG41 117GB33 3RG41 117GA33 Order No. 3 m, 3 0.25 mm2 3RG41 110AG00 3RG41 113AG00 3RG41 113AG22

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp

With 8 mm combination plug

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
4 A 15 B 4

3RG41 110..33
M 8x1 SW 13

3RG41 117..33
M 8x1

3RG41 110..00
M 8x1
34 SW 13

3RG41 113..00
M 8x1

3RG41 113..22
M 8x1

SW 13

SW 13

45 33

50

NSD00314b

NSD0_00340a

LED

NSD0_00341c

LED

LED

NSD0_00359

NSD00356

LED (4x) Sg

55

60

43

LED

M 12x1

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/184

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 13

35

34

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 2.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm Molded plastic V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 200 1200 5 25/1000 (AC/DC) 0.04 100 Yellow LED IP67

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 800 0.05 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 16 17 2 8 9 E, F E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 720AB00 3RG40 720AA00 3RG40 723AB00 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 720KB00 3RG40 720KA00 3RG40 723KB00 3RG40 723KA00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
B A 7 6

3RG40 723..00
M 14x1

Plan view
NSD00400

3RG40 72-0..00
M 14x1

20

12

23

27
6x3,5 3,5 20 5,5
NSD00398a

56

23

20 LED 56

NSD00402a

NSD00399a

5,5 LED

Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area These prox imity switches can be mounted nex t to one another.

66

6x3,5 3,5

20

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/185

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 2.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Greater rated operating distance (IP68) 3-wire 6.5 mm Flush 2.5 mm Stainless steel V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 200 Hz 1000 mm 0.15 ms 50 IP68 Greater rated operating distance (IP68) 3-wire M8 Flush 2.5 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 1000 0.15 50 IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.14 mm2 3RG46 020AG02 Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 3RG46 110AG02

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions A = active surface B = metal-free area X 1.6 mm when mounted in steel, X 0.8 mm when mounted in other metal 3RG46 02
6 A 16 B 9 A

3RG46 11
8 16 B 9 A B

3RG46 020AG02
6,5

NSD01191

3RG46 110AG02
M 8x1 SW 13

45

45

2/186

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00393

NSD00392

NSD00395

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 3 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Increased operating distance 3-wire 6.5 mm Almost flush 3 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 200 Hz 1000 mm 0.15 ms 50 Yellow LED IP67 Increased operating distance 3-wire M8 Almost flush 3 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 1000 0.15 50 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 2 4 A E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.14 mm2 3RG43 020AG01 3RG43 027AG01 Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 3RG43 110AG01 3RG43 110GB01 3RG43 117AG01 3RG43 113AG01 3RG43 113GB01

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With 8 mm combination plug With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A X 10 13 B 9
A 8 16 B 9 A B X
M 8x1
NSD00395

X 1.3 mm when mounted in steel, X 0.65 mm when mounted in other metal 3RG43 020AG01 3RG43 027AG01
6,5 6,5

NSD00397

X 1.6 mm when mounted in steel, X 0.8 mm when mounted in other metal 3RG43 110..01 3RG43 117..01 3RG43 113..01
M 8x1
33 SW 13 M 8x1

33

33

45

45

53

SW 13

66

60

NSD00407

NSD00403

LED
NSD00406

LED

NSD00405

LED

LED
7

Sg

NSD00404

Sg

M 12x1

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 13 33
LED Sg

33

2/187

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 3 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance 3-wire 8 mm 8 mm Almost flush 3 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 1000 0.15 50 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 4 A A Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.14 mm2 3RG43 370AG01 3RG43 370GB01 3RG43 377AG01 3RG43 377GB01

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With 8 mm combination plug

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
12 A
40 37

3RG43 370..01
8x8 3
10

3RG43 377..01
8x8 3

16

B 9
5

20

50 37

M3
NSD00333a

59

NSD00412

LED

LED
Sg
NSD00334a

M3

A = active surface B = metal-free area X 2.4 mm when mounted in steel, X 1.2 mm when mounted in other metal

2/188

Siemens FS 10 2008

20

10

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 200 1200 5 25/900 (AC/DC) 0.12 100 Yellow LED IP67

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 16 17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220AB00 3RG40 220AA00 3RG40 223AB00 3RG40 223AA00 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220KB00 3RG40 220KA00 3RG40 223KB00 3RG40 223KA00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
15 A 9 27 B
6,5

3RG40 220A.00
M 12x1

3RG40 223A.00
M 12x1

3RG40 220K.00
M 12x1 6,5

3RG40 223K.00
M 12x1

6,5

6,5

60

4 SW 17
LED (4x) Sg

71

62

SW 17

SW 17

62

NSD00423

NSD0_00424a

LED

NSD0_00424a

NSD00425a

LED (4x) Sg

SW 17

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

71

NSD00425a

60

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/189

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 12 mm Not flush 4 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 800 mm 0.2 ms 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 620AG30 3RG40 620AF30 3RG40 620GB30 3RG40 620GA30 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220AG30 3RG40 220AF30 3RG40 220GB30 3RG40 220GA30 Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220AG31 3RG40 220GB31

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
15 A 9 27 B 8

3RG40 620..30
12

3RG40 220..30
M 12x1

3RG40 220..31
M 12x1

6,5

50

50

SW 17

56

NSD00423

NSD00372

LED

NSD0_00420a

NSD00360a

LED

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/190

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 17

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Molded plastic V V 10 ... 65 IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) 2-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 200 1200 5 25/900 (AC/DC) 0.12 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 16 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220AB30 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 220KB30

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
15 A 9 27 B 8

3RG40 220AB30
M 12x1 4

3RG40 220KB30
M 12x1 4
NSD00364

SW 17

NSD00423

NSD00364

LED

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 17

56

56

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/191

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Increased operating distance 3-wire M12, Shorty Flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 10 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 400 mm 0.2 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Increased operating distance 3-wire M12 Flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 400 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 2 3 E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG41 120AG33 3RG41 123AG33 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG41 120AG01 3RG41 120AF01 3RG41 123AG01 3RG41 123AF01

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
16 A 14 B

3RG41 120AG33
M 12x1

3RG41 123AG33
M 12x1

3RG41 120A.01
M 12x1

3RG41 123A.01
M 12x1

35

34

4 59
NSD00361b

45

SW 17

NSD00440

NSD00366

NSD00367b

NSD00360a

LED

SW 17 LED (4x) Sg

SW 17

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/192

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 17
LED (4x) Sg

50

48

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M14 Not flush 5 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 65 10 300 300 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 13 4 E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 820AB00 3RG40 823AB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG40 82
20 A 12 40 B 15
23 20

3RG40 823..00
M 14x1

Plan view
NSD00400

12

27

NSD00475a

NSD00399a

5,5 LED

Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area

66

6x3,5 3,5

20

56

12

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/193

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/490 (AC/DC) 0.15 100 Yellow LED IP67

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 800 (NO contact), 4000 (NC contact) 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 16 17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 130AB00 3RG40 130AA00 3RG40 133AB00 3RG40 133AA00 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 130KB00 3RG40 130KA00 3RG40 133KB00 3RG40 133KA00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
11 A 30 B 10

3RG40 130..00 3RG40 130..01


M 18x1

3RG40 133..00 3RG40 133..01


M 18x1
4

NSD00451

54

SW 24

NSD00446b

NSD00445

LED
M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/194

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 24 58,5

69 55

LED (4x)

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 18 mm Flush 5 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 800 mm 0.15 ms 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 530AG30 3RG40 530AF30 3RG40 530GB30 3RG40 530GA30 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 130AG30 3RG40 130AF30 3RG40 130GB30 3RG40 130GA30 Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 130AG31 3RG40 130GB31

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
11 A 30 B 10

3RG40 530..30
8

3RG40 130..30
M 18x1

3RG40 130..31
M 18x1

54

54

NSD00451

SW 24

54

NSD00459

LED
NSD00445

LED

NSD00445

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 24

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/195

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 6 mm

I Tech nical sp ecificatio ns


Cl ass N u m b er o f co nd u cto rs D esi gn I nstal l ati on i n m etal R ated o p erati ng d i stance sn E nc lo su re ma teria l O p era tio na l vo lta g e (D C ) N o -lo a d su p p ly c u rrent I0 R a ted o p era tio na l c u rrent Ie Sw itc h ing freq u enc y f R ep ea t a c c u ra c y R P o w er-u p d ela y tv Sw itc h ing sta tu s d isp la y P rec a u tio ns Sp u rio u s sig na l su p p ressio n Sh o rt-c irc u it-p ro o f/o verlo a d -p ro o f R everse-p o la rity p ro tec tio n W ire-b rea k p ro tec tio n Ind u c tive interferenc e p ro tec tio n R a d io interferenc e p ro tec tio n D eg ree o f p ro tec tio n I ncreased o p erati ng d i stance 3-w i re M8 N o t fl u sh 6m m B ra ss, nic k el-p la ted V 10 ... 3 0 mA 10 mA 200 H z 5 00 mm 0.15 ms 15 Y ello w L E D IP 6 7 I ncreased o p erati ng d i stance 3-w i re M 12 Al m o st fl u sh 6m m B ra ss, nic k el-p la ted 10 ... 3 0 10 200 800 0.15 15 Y ello w L E D IP 6 7

I S electio n and O rd ering d ata


Sw itc h ing o u tp u t C k t. d ia g . N o. 11 13 2 4 2 2 A A E,F E,F C o nnec - O rd er N o . to r ty p e 3 0.14 mm2 3R G 43 210A G 01 3R G 43 210G B 01 3R G 43 217A G 01 3R G 43 217G B 01 3R G 43 213A G 01 3R G 43 213G B 01 O rd er N o . 3 0.3 4 mm2 3R G 43 120A G 01 3R G 43 120G B 01 3R G 43 123A G 01 3R G 43 123G B 01

W i th 2 m cab l e, P U R
N O c o nta c t, p np N O c o nta c t, np n N O c o nta c t, p np N O c o nta c t, np n N O c o nta c t, p np N O c o nta c t, nnn

W i th 8 m m co m b i nati on pl ug

W i th M 12 co nnecto r

I D im ensio ns
M o u nti ng i nstru cti o ns D imensio n d ep end ing o n fo rm A = a c tive su rfa c e B = meta l-free a rea
A 16 20 40 B 18
A 12 24 B 18 A B
N S D 0 0 48 4

N S D 0 0 48 3

3 R G 4 3 21 0..01
M 8x1 4

3 R G 4 3 21 7 ..01
M 8x1
4 S W 13

3 R G 4 3 21 3 ..01
M 8x1
4 S W 13 29

X 2.4 mm w h en mo u nted in steel, X 1.2 mm w h en mo u nted in o th er meta l 3 R G 4 3 12 0..01 3 R G 4 3 12 3 ..01


M 12x1

M 12x1

29 S W 13

X
S W 17 37

4
LE D Sg
N S D 0 0 48 1 a

60

LE D
N S D 0 0 47 7

LE D
N S D 0 0 47 9 b

62

LE D
22

LE D
N S D 0 0 48 0 a

6 8 ,5

Sg

Sg

N S D 0 0 47 8 a

M 12x1

2/196

Siemens FS 10 2008

S W 17 37

29

41 ,5

41

50

60

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms M inimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection E xtra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 10 ... 65 E xtra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/340 (AC/DC) 0.2 100 Yellow LED IP67

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 500 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 16 17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230AB00 3RG40 230AA00 3RG40 233AB00 3RG40 233AA00 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230K B00 3RG40 230K A00 3RG40 233K B00 3RG40 233K A00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
20 A 11 28 B 15

3RG40 230..00 3RG40 230..01


M 18x1

3RG40 233..00 3RG40 233..01


M 18x1
4

15

69 55 10,5

54 10,5

NSD00500

SW 24

NSD00493

LED

NSD00494b

A = active surface B = metal-free area

M 12x1

SW 24 58,5

LED (4x)

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/197

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 18 mm Not flush 8 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 300 mm 0.2 ms 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 630AG30 3RG40 630AF 30 3RG40 630GB30 3RG40 630GA30 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230AG30 3RG40 230AF 30 3RG40 230GB30 3RG40 230GA30 Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230AG31

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
20 A 11 50 B 15

3RG40 630..30
8

3RG40 230..30
M 18x1

3RG40 230..31
M 18x1

15

54

54

SW 24

54 10,5

NSD00501

NSD00459

NSD00493

LED
NSD00445

LED

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/198

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 24

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) 3-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Molded plastic V V 10 ... 65 IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) 2-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/340 (AC/DC) 0.2 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 500 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 16 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230AB30 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 230KB30

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
20 A 11 50 B 15

3RG40 230AB30
M 18x1

3RG40 230KB30
M 18x1

15

54

54

NSD00501

SW 24

NSD00445

NSD00445

LED

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 24

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/199

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance 3-wire M18 Flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 34 10 200 500 0.2 3 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 11 2 E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG41 130AG33 3RG41 133AG33 Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp

3 0.25 mm2 3RG41 130AG01 3RG41 133AG01

With 3 m cable, PUR With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
20 A 30 B 3 20

3RG41 130..33
M 18x1 4

3RG41 133..33
M 18x1 4

3RG41 130..01
M 18x1

3RG41 133..01
M 18x1 4

45 31

SW 24 34

35

SW 24

NSD01071

SW 24

70

NSD00447

NSD01067

NSD0_ 00456b

LED (4x)

NSD0_ 01069a

LED

LED Sg M 12x1

M 12x1

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/200

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 24 52

50

70

50

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 10 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/200 (AC/DC) 0.3 100 Yellow LED IP67

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 300 0.3 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 16 17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 140AB00 3RG40 140AA00 3RG40 143AB00 3RG40 143AA00 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 140KB00 3RG40 140KA00 3RG40 143KB00 3RG40 143KA00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
25 37 B 16

3RG40 140..00
M 30x1,5
5

3RG40 143..00
M 30x1,5

54

NSD00518a

NSD00521

SW 36

LED

NSD00519

LED (4x Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 36 58,5

69 55

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/201

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 10 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 30 mm Flush 10 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 300 mm 0.3 ms 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.3 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.3 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 540AG30 3RG40 540AF30 3RG40 540GB30 3RG40 540GA30 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 140AG30 3RG40 140AF30 3RG40 140GB30 3RG40 140GA30 Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 140AG31 3RG40 140GB31

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
25 A 45 B

3RG40 540..30
30

3RG40 140..30
M 30x1,5
5

3RG40 140..31
M 30x1,5
5 54
NSD00518a

16

54

54

SW 36

NSD0_00525a

NSD00522

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/202

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00518a

LED

LED

SW 36

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 10 mm Operating distance 12 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Increased operating distance 3-wire M12 Not flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 10 ... 30 mA 10 mA 200 Hz 400 mm 0.2 ms 15 Yellow LED IP67 Increased operating distance 3-wire M18 Almost flush 12 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 500 0.6 50 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 4 E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG43 220AG01 3RG43 223AG01 Order No. 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 131AB01 3RG46 130GB00 3RG46 133AB01 3RG46 133GB01

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG43 22
18 A 12 36 B
4 50 5,7 SW 17 37

3RG43 220AG01
M 12x1

3RG43 223AG01
M 12x1 4

3RG46 131AB01 3RG46 133AB01 3RG46 130GB00 3RG46 133GB01


M 18x1
M 18x1

5,7

30

SW 24 34

SW 17 37

10

60

50

NSD0_00513a

LED

LED
NSD0_00514a

63,5

40

NSD00517

LED
NSD00537

LED

Sg
NSD00538

Sg

3RG46 13
14 A 36 B 4 36

A = active surface B = metal-free area

NSD00543

SW 24 34

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/203

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/220 (AC/DC) 0.4 100 Yellow LED IP67

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 16 17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240AB00 3RG40 240AA00 3RG40 243AB00 3RG40 243AA00 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240KB00 3RG40 240KA00 3RG40 243KB00 3RG40 243KA00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
30 A 15 80 B 25
16

3RG40 240..00 3RG40 243..00


M 30x1,5 M 30x1,5 16

15

54

5 LED (4x) M 12x1 SW 36 58,5

NSD00548

NSD0_00544b

LED

SW 36

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/204

Siemens FS 10 2008

69
NSD00545b

55

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency Repeat accuracy Power-up delay LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 10 ... 65 20 300 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/150 (AC/DC) 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 23 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 316AD00 Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2

With terminal box


NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable

24

3RG40 316KD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
25 A 75 B
4

3RG40 316AD00
0 4 0

3RG40 316KD00
40
45 40

40

30

60

NSD 01164

A
G 3 0

E N 7 , 3

LED YE 7,3 5,3 14

, 3 1 4 M

, 5

30

M 20 1,5

A = active surface B = metal-free area

T he active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

T he active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

NSD0_00560a

E E

D
6 4 a

120

5
2 0

, 3

5,3

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/205

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic V V 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 Increased operating distance 3-wire M30 Flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 2 25/50 (AC/DC) 0.75 0.04 ... 3.3 100 Yellow LED IP67 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP67

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 1.5 mA 2.0 mA 300 mA mA Hz mm mm ms

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 2 8 E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG41 140AG01 3RG41 143AG01

With 3 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NO contact 3RG40 383KB00

With M12 connector With M12 connector, rotatable

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
25 A 75 B 30

3RG40 383..00
LED 40 46 55
NSD 01163

3RG41 140AG01
M 30x1,5

3RG41 143AG01
M 30x1,5

69

50

50

NSD 01164

A
30 40 5,3x7,3 M 12x1 40
LED
NSD00554

A = active surface B = metal-free area

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.

LED

NSD00555

Sg

2/206

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 36 52

SW 36

70

70

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 30 mm Not flush 15 mm Molded plastic V 15 ... 34 mA 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 300 mm 0.4 ms 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 12 13 14 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 640AG30 3RG40 640AF30 3RG40 640GB30 3RG40 640GA30 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240AG30 3RG40 240AF30 3RG40 240GB30 3RG40 240GA30 Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240AG31 3RG40 240GB31

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
30 A 15 80 B 25

3RG40 640..30
30

3RG40 240..30
M 30x1,5
5

3RG40 240..31
M 30x1,5 16

15

54

54

NSD00548

SW 36

54

NSD0_00525a

NSD00518a

LED

NSD0_00544b

LED

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 36

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/207

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) 3-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Molded plastic V V 10 ... 65 IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) 2-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/220 (AC/DC) 0.4 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 10 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 16 Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240AB30 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 240KB30

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
30 A 15 80 B 25

3RG40 240AB30
M 30x1,5
5

3RG40 240KB30
M 30x1,5
5 54
NSD00518a

15

54

SW 36

NSD00548

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/208

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00518a

LED

LED

SW 36

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic V V 15 ... 34 IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/150 (AC/DC) 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

mA 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) mA mA Hz mm ms 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connec- Order No. tor type 4 0.14 mm2 3RG40 300CD00 3RG40 300CD01 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG40 300AB00 3RG40 300AA00 3RG40 300AB01 Order No. 2 0.25 mm2 3RG40 300KB00 3RG40 300KA00 3RG40 300KB01 3RG40 300KA01

With 2 m cable, PUR


S en so r i nl ongi tu d i n al axi s
NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact 11 12 10 16 17 11 10 16 17

S en so r 90 to l ongi tu d i n al axi s

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
25 A 75 B 30

3RG40 300..0.
40
45,5

40

30
5,3

35

NSD 01164

111,5

7,3x5,3
B

28

A = active surface B = metal-free area

NSD00561

LED YE

60

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/209

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 20 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm Molded plastic V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/100 (AC/DC) 1.0 20 Yellow LED IP65

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 20 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 75 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 23 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 416AD00 Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2

With terminal box


NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable

24

3RG40 416KD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
70 A 50 100 B
4

3RG40 416AD00
0 4 0

3RG40 416KD00
40
45 40

40

40

40

NSD00583

L G 7 3 0

E N , 3

LED YE 7,3 5,3 14

, 3 1 4 M

, 5

30

M 201,5

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/210

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD0_00560a

60

D
4 a

120

5
2 0

, 3

5,3

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 20 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance 3-wire M18 Not flush 20 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 200 1.0 100 Yellow LED IP67 Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 30 1.5 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 4 18 E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 230AB02 3RG46 230GB02 3RG46 233AB02 3RG46 233GB02 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG41 346CD01 Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector

With terminal box


NO contact and NC contact, pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG46 23
10
36 A 100 B 80

3RG46 230..02
M 18x1

3RG46 233..02
M 18x1 10 SW 24 34

3RG41 346CD01
40
45 40

40

SW 24 34

63,5 40

118

20

50

5,3 LED YE LED G N 7,35,3 30 14


60
NSD0_00570a

LED
NSD00574a

LED

NSD00571

NSD00572

Sg

M 201,5

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor.

3RG46 38, 3RG41 34

A = active surface B = metal-free area

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/211

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 20 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm Molded plastic V V 15 ... 34 Greater rated operating distance (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.5 2.0 200 < 2 25/30 (AC/DC) 0.75 0.05 ... 3.3 100 Yellow LED IP67

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 30 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) mA mA Hz mm mm ms 30 0.75 0.05 ... 3.3 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 1 8 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No.

With M12 connector


NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, npn NO contact F F F 3RG41 383CD00 3RG41 383GD00 3RG41 383KB00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
30 A 80 B 40

3RG41 383..00
LED 40 46 55
NSD 01163

NSD 01165

A
30 40 5,3x7,3 M 12x1 40

A = active surface B = metal-free area

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.

2/212

Siemens FS 10 2008

69

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 22 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance 3-wire M30 Almost flush 22 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 100 1.1 200 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 4 E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 140AB00 3RG46 140GB00 3RG46 143AB00 3RG46 143GB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
37 A 80 B 6 66

3RG46 140..00
M 30x1,5

3RG46 143..00
M 30x1,5

SW 36 45

NSD00593a

LED
NSD00589

73,5

50

60

LED Sg

NSD00590

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 36 45

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/213

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 25 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Almost flush 25 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 50 1.5 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 23 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG41 316AD00

With terminal box


NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp

18

V ersion for O p el (increased E M C )


23 3RG41 316AD04

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG41 31
90 A 180 B
5

3RG41 316AD0.
4 0 4 0

75

, 3 D

NSD00595a

Y L G

E E

1 0

E N 7 , 3

, 3 1 4 M

, 5

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.


B

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/214

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 30 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Extra duty ((DC 65 V) 3-wire Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Not flush 30 mm Molded plastic V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Not flush 30 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/60 (AC/DC) 1.0 100 Yellow LED IP65

mA 40 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 50 1.0 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 23 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 426AD00 Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2

With terminal box


NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable

24

3RG40 426KD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
90 A 60 210 B 90

3RG40 426AD00
6 4 0 M 5 2 0 x 1 , 5

3RG40 426KD00
6 4 0 M 5 2 0 x 1 , 5

L Y L G E

E E D N

L Y

E E

, 5

40

, 5

NSD00608

A
5 , 3 4 1

, 3 4 1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/215

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 30 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 30 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 30 1.5 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 18 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG41 446CD01

With terminal box


NO contact and NC contact, pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
90 A 60 160 B 90
45

3RG41 446CD01
40
40

40

40

118

5,3 LED YE LED GN 7,35,3 30 14


60
NSD0_00570a

NSD00605

M 201,5

A = active surface B = metal-free area

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor.

2/216

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 35 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At UB max Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 35 mm Molded plastic V V 15 ... 34 Increased operating distance (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 35 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.5 2.0 300 <2 25/30 (AC/DC) 0.75 0.05 ... 7.7 100 Yellow LED IP67

mA 30 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) mA mA Hz mm mm ms 30 0.75 0.05 ... 7.7 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 1 8 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No.

With M12 connector


NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, npn NO contact F F F 3RG41 483CD00 3RG41 483GD00 3RG41 483KB00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
80 A 15 160 B 90

3RG41 483..00
LED 40 46 55
NSD 01163

40

NSD 01166

30 40
B

5,3x7,3

M 12x1 40

A = active surface B = metal-free area

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.

69

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/217

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 40 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage DC Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Not flush 40 mm Molded plastic V V 10 ... 65 Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Not flush 40 mm Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/60 (AC/DC) 1.0 100 Yellow LED IP65

AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

mA 40 mA mA 300 mA mA Hz mm ms 10 1.0 200 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 23 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG40 436AD00 Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2

With terminal box


NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable

24

3RG40 436KD00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
80 A 15 160 B 90

3RG40 436AD00
80,3 65 LED YE LED GN 27,5 P g 13,5
NSD00625

3RG40 436KD00
80,3 65 LED YE 27,5 P g 13,5
NSD00624

NSD00613

40

100 65

5,3 41,5

100 65

5,3 41,5

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/218

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 30/40 mm

I Tech nical specificatio ns


Cl ass N u mb er o f co ndu cto rs D esign I nstal l atio n in metal R ated o perating distance sn E nc lo su re ma teria l O p era tio na l vo lta g e D C AC N o -lo a d su p p ly c u rrent I0 A t 24 V D C A t 23 0 V A C R a ted o p era tio na l c u rrent Ie C o ntinu o u s 20 ms M inimu m lo a d c u rrent Sw itc h ing freq u enc y f R ep ea t a c c u ra c y R P o w er-u p d ela y tv LED s Sw itc h ing sta tu s Su p p ly vo lta g e P rec a u tio ns Sp u rio u s sig na l su p p ressio n Sh o rt-c irc u it-p ro o f/o verlo a d -p ro o f R everse-p o la rity p ro tec tio n W ire-b rea k p ro tec tio n Ind u c tive interferenc e p ro tec tio n R a d io interferenc e p ro tec tio n D eg ree o f p ro tec tio n E xtra du ty (65 V D C / F o rd) 3-w ire C u b ic 80 mm 100 mm N o t fl u sh / fl u sh 30 mm / 40 mm M o ld ed p la stic V V mA mA mA mA mA H z mm ms 10 ... 6 5 40 3 00 10 2 200 Y ello w L E D G reen L E D IP 6 5 E xtra du ty (A C /D C ) 2-w ire C u b ic 80 mm 100 mm N o t fl u sh / fl u sh 30 mm / 40 mm M o ld ed p la stic 20 ... 3 20 20 ... 26 5 1.0 1.5 3 00 1800 5 25/6 0 (A C /D C ) 2 100 Y ello w L E D IP 6 5

I S electio n and Ordering data


Sw itc h ing o u tp u t C k t. d ia g . N o. 23 C o nnec - O rd er N o . to r ty p e 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3R G 40 336A D 01 O rd er N o . 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2

W ith terminal b ox
N O N C rep N O N C rep c o nta c t o r c o nta c t o sitio na b le, p np c o nta c t o r c o nta c t o sitio na b le

24

3R G 40 336K D 01

I D imensio ns
M o u nting instru ctio ns O p era ting d ista nc e 3 0 mm
80 A 15 160 B 90

3 R G 4 0 3 3 6 A D 01
8 0,3 65 LE D YE LE D G N 2 7 ,5 P g 13,5

3 R G 4 0 3 3 6 K D 01
8 0,3 65
NSD0062 5

P g 13,5
NSD0062 4

LE D YE

40

100 65

NSD00613

5 ,3
B

100 65

2 7 ,5

5 ,3
4 1,5

4 1,5

O p era ting d ista nc e 4 0 mm


80 A 160 B
90

A = a c tive su rfa c e B = meta l-free a rea

NSD0062 7

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/219

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 40 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance 3-wire M30 Not flush 40 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 100 1.1 200 Yellow LED IP67 (not suitable for use under continuously wet conditions or outdoors)

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 4 E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 240AB 02 3RG46 240GB 02 3RG46 243AB 02 3RG46 243GB 02

With 2 m cable, P U R
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
55 A 150 B 35 120
10

3RG46 240..02
M 30x 1,5

3RG46 243..02
M 30x 1,5
10

SW 36 44

NSD00615a

73,5 51,5

60

LED
NSD00607a

LED

Sg
NSD0_ 00609b

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/220

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 36 44

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 40 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance (DC 65 V) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 40 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 20 1.5 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 19 23 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG41 416AB03 3RG41 416AD00

With terminal box


NO contact, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp

V ersi o n fo r O p el (i n creased E M C )
23 3RG41 416AD04

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
90 A 70 180 B
4

3RG41 416A.0.
0 4 0

40 100

5
0

, 3 D

NSD00621

Y L G

E E

1 0

E N 7 , 3

, 3 1 4 M

, 5

A = active surface B = metal-free area

T he active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/221

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 25 mm or 40 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Increased operating distance (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 25 mm or 40 mm, selectable Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 20 1.5 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 2 Connec- Order No. tor type

With M12 connector


NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG41 413AB02

Connector can b e offset in steps of 30


NO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG41 413AB01

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Operating distance 25 mm
70 A 50 180 B
45
45

3RG41 413AB02
40 40 40

3RG41 413AB01
40 40 40

40 50

30

30

NSD00623

A
M 12x1

5,3 LED YE LED GN 7,3x5,3 Sg 16

131,5 120 60

149 120 60

5,3 LED YE LED GN 7,3x5,3 13,3


NSD00618

NSD00617

Operating distance 40 mm
40 A 70 180 B 40 100

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

M 12x1

Sg

16

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

NSD01169

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/222

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distances 50 and 65 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Increased operating distance (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Not flush 50 mm Molded plastic V 10 ... 65 mA 20 mA 300 Hz 20 mm 1.5 ms 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65 Increased operating distance (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Not flush 65 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 10 2 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 23 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG41 426AD00 Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG41 436AD00

With terminal box


NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG41 42
120 A 70 180 B 40 150
, 5

3RG41 426AD00
6 4 0 M 5 2 0 x 1 , 5

3RG41 436AD00
80,3 65 LED YE LED GN 27,5 Pg 13,5
NSD00625

L Y L G E

E E D N

NSD 00636

A
5

, 3 4 1

100 65

5,3 41,5

3RG41 43
150 A 60 500 B

NSD00639

A = active surface B = metal-free area

40 120

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/223

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 1.5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M8 Flush 1.5 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 150 < 2000 0.16 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 4 2 4 A A E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG46 110AN01 3RG46 110GN01 3RG46 117AN01 3RG46 117GN01 3RG46 113AN01 3RG46 113GN01

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With 8 mm combination plug

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
4 A
49,6 40

3RG46 110.N01
M 8x1

3RG46 117.N01
M 8x1

3RG46 113.N01
M 8x1
NSD00350

12

B 3

42 40

NSD00348

NSD00349

NSD00319

57,4

40

LED
17

9,2

LED

1,6

M 12x1

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/224

Siemens FS 10 2008

6,2

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 3 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M12 Flush 3 mm Brass or stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 200 3000 0.04 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP67 IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.14 mm2 3RG46 120AN01 3RG46 120GN01 3RG46 120AN61 3RG46 120GN61

With 2 m cable, PUR


B rass, ch rom e-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 11 13 11 13

S tainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector


B rass, ch rom e-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 2 4 2 4 2 2 E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F 3RG46 123AN01 3RG46 123GN01 3RG46 123AN05 3RG46 123GN05 3RG46 123AN61 3RG46 123GN61

B rass, teflon-coated

S tainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
24 A B 9

3RG46 120.N..
M 12x1

3RG46 123.N..
M 12x1

SW 17

NSD00416

LED Sg
NSD00413

LED

NSD00414

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 17

50,4

52

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/225

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M8 Not flush 4 mm Stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 150 < 2000 0.16 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 11 13 2 4 2 4 A A E, F E, F Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.25 mm2 3RG46 210AN01 3RG46 210GN01 3RG46 217AN01 3RG46 217GN01 3RG46 213AN01 3RG46 213GN01

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With 8 mm combination plug

With M12 connector

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
20 A 16 27 B 8
5

3RG46 210.N01
M 8x1

3RG46 217.N01
M 8x1

3RG46 213.N01
5

41,6 35

NSD00417

49,2 35

NSD00418

57

NSD00419

35

LED
17

1,6

NSD0_00429

9,2

A = active surface B = metal-free area

M 12x1

2/226

Siemens FS 10 2008

6,2

LED

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 5 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass or stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 200 2500 0.1 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP67 IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 130AN01 3RG46 130GN01 3RG46 130AN61 3RG46 130GN61

With 2 m cable, PUR


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 11 13 11 13

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 2 4 2 4 2 2 E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F 3RG46 133AN01 3RG46 133GN01 3RG46 133AN05 3RG46 133GN05 3RG46 133AN61 3RG46 133GN61

Brass, teflon-coated

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
36 A B 15

3RG46 130.N..
M 18x1

3RG46 133.N..
M 18x1
NSD00461

40

54

NSD00463

SW 24

30 LED Sg 53
4

NSD00460

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 24

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/227

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M12 Not flush 8 mm Brass or stainless steel 10 ... 30 12 200 2000 0.16 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP67 IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 220AN01 3RG46 220GN01 3RG46 220AN61 3RG46 220GN61

With 2 m cable, PUR


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 11 13 11 13

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 2 4 2 4 2 2 E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F 3RG46 223AN01 3RG46 223GN01 3RG46 223AN05 3RG46 223GN05 3RG46 223AN61 3RG46 223GN61

Brass, teflon-coated

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
18 A 36 B 24

3RG46 220.N..
M 12x1
10

3RG46 223.N..
M 12x1
10 30
LED

16

SW 17

54 40

NSD00492

NSD00489

Sg
NSD00490

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/228

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 17

51

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 10 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass or stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 200 2000 0.2 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP67 IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 140AN01 3RG46 140GN01 3RG46 140AN61 3RG46 140GN61

With 2 m cable, PUR


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 11 13 11 13

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 2 4 2 4 2 2 E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F 3RG46 143AN01 3RG46 143GN01 3RG46 143AN05 3RG46 143GN05 3RG46 143AN61 3RG46 143GN61

Brass, teflon-coated

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
60 A B 30

3RG46 140.N..
M 30x1,5

3RG46 143.N..
M 30x1,5
NSD00530

5 50 64

NSD00532

SW 36

SW 36
LED Sg

50 63

NSD00529

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/229

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 12 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M18 Not flush 12 mm Brass or stainless steel 10 ... 30 12 200 2000 0.24 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP67 IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 230AN01 3RG46 230GN01 3RG46 230AN61 3RG46 230GN61

With 2 m cable, PUR


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 11 13 11 13

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 2 4 2 4 2 2 E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F 3RG46 233AN01 3RG46 233GN01 3RG46 233AN05 3RG46 233GN05 3RG46 233AN61 3RG46 233GN61

Brass, teflon-coated

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
27 A 54 B 36

3RG46 230.N..
M 18x1
10

3RG46 233.N..
M 18x1
10

24

40 54

NSD00541

SW 24

LED Sg
NSD00535
NSD00536

LED

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/230

Siemens FS 10 2008

4 SW 24

30 53

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 30 15 200 250 0.3 8 Yellow LED Green LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 2 4 28 29 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No.

With M12 connector


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn E, F E, F 3RG46 383AN01 3RG46 383GN01 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG46 346AN01 3RG46 346GN01

With terminal box

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG46 38
40 80 B

3RG46 383.N01
LED 46 52 65
NSD00566

3RG46 346.N01
40
46 40

40

45

LED 7,3 5,3 30 14

30 40

5,3x7,3

40

M 20x1,5

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.


B 45

3RG46 34
20 80

NSD 00569

A = active surface B = metal-free area

NSD0_00597a

Sg

60

NSD 00569

114

5,3

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/231

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 20 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire M30 Not flush 20 mm Brass or stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 200 1500 0.4 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP67 IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. Connec- Order No. tor type 3 0.34 mm2 3RG46 240AN01 3RG46 240GN01 3RG46 240AN61 3RG46 240GN61

With 2 m cable, PUR


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 11 13 11 13

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

With M12 connector


Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn 2 4 2 4 2 2 E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F 3RG46 243AN01 3RG46 243GN01 3RG46 243AN05 3RG46 243GN05 3RG46 243AN61 3RG46 243GN61

Brass, teflon-coated

Stainless steel
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
45 A 90 B 60

3RG46 240.N..
M 30x1,5

3RG46 243.N..
M 30x1,5

15

64

63

50

40

NSD00578

SW 36

LED
NSD00576

NSD00575

LED

Sg

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/232

Siemens FS 10 2008

5 SW 36

15

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 25 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 25 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 30 15 200 250 0.5 8 Yellow LED Green LED Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mT r.m.s. IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 2 4 28 29 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No.

With M12 connector


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn E, F E, F 3RG46 483AN01 3RG46 483GN01 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG46 446AN02 3RG46 446GN02

With terminal box

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
50 A 20 160 B

3RG46 483.N01
LED 46 52 65
NSD00566

3RG46 446.N02
40
46 40

40

30

75

LED 7,35,3 30 14

30 40

5,3x7,3

40

M 20x1,5

A = active surface B = metal-free area

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

NSD0_00597a

Sg

60

NSD 00599

114

5,3

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/233

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 35 and 40 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Reduction factor 1 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 35 mm Molded plastic V 10 ... 30 mA 15 mA 200 Hz 250 mm 0.7 ms 8 Yellow LED Green LED Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mT r.m.s. IP68 Reduction factor 1 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 40 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 30 15 200 250 0.8 8 Yellow LED Green LED Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mT r.m.s. IP68

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 2 4 28 29 Connec- Order No. tor type Order No.

With M12 connector


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn E, F E, F 3RG46 483AN11 3RG46 483GN11 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG46 446AN01 3RG46 446GN01

With terminal box

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions 3RG46 483.N11
46 52 65
80 A 15 160 B 90

3RG46 483.N11
LED
NSD00566

3RG46 446.N01 40
46 40

40

40

NSD 01065a

LED 7,35,3 30 14

30 40

5,3x7,3

40

M 20x1,5

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.


B
40 120

3RG46 446.N01
40 A 20 160

NSD00631

A = active surface B = metal-free area

2/234

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD0_00597a

Sg

60

114

5,3

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI400
Operating distance 75 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm ms Reduction factor 1 3-wire Cubic 80 mm 80 mm Not flush 75 mm Molded plastic 10 ... 30 15 200 250 1.5 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 75 mT r.m.s. IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 28 29 Connec- Order No. tor type 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 3RG46 436AN01 3RG46 436GN01

With terminal box


NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
120 A 80 400 B
40 150

3RG46 436.N01
NSD00637

5,5

65

NSD00641

Pg 13,5

65 80
B

27,5 40,5

A = active surface B = metal-free area

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/235

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI600
Operating distances 2 and 4 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Ex Z one 2 4-wire M12 Flush 2 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 1200 mm 0.1 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Ex Z one 2 4-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Connector type Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 A 3RG40 120CD00-0X A0 A 3RG40 120CD00-0X B0 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 A 3RG40 220CD00-0X A0 A 3RG40 220CD00-0X B0

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact and NC contact, pnp Z one 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Z one 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X

With M12 connector


NO contact and NC contact, pnp Z one 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Z one 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X A 3RG40 123CD00-0X A0 A 3RG40 123CD00-0X B0 A 3RG40 223CD00-0X A0 A 3RG40 223CD00-0X B0

A: Subject to ex port regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A 6 12 B

4 A
5

13

B 4,5

NSD00363

3RG40 120CD00
M 12x1 4

3RG40 123CD00
M 12x1

3RG40 220CD00
M 12x1 6,5

NSD00332

3RG40 223CD00
M 12x1 6,5

48

4 65
NSD0_00421a

50

59

SW 17

SW 17

NSD00360a

NSD0_00420a

SW 17

LED
NSD00361b

LED (4x) Sg

LED

LED (4x) Sg

2/236

Siemens FS 10 2008

SW 17

54

56

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI600
Operating distances 5 and 8 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Ex Zone 2 4-wire M18 Flush 5 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 800 mm 0.15 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Ex Zone 2 4-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 500 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Connector type Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 A 3RG40 130CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 130CD00-0XB0 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 A 3RG40 230CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 230CD00-0XB0

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact and NC contact, pnp Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X

With M12 connector


NO contact and NC contact, pnp Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X 3RG40 133CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 133CD00-0XB0 A 3RG40 233CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 233CD00-0XB0

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A 11 30 B 10
A 11
NSD00451

20

28

B 15

3RG40 130CD00
M 18x1

3RG40 133CD00
M 18x1 4

3RG40 230CD00
M 18x1

NSD00500

15

3RG40 233CD00
M 18x1 4

69 55 10,5

54 10,5

SW 24 58,5

SW 24

NSD00446b

SW 24

NSD00493

NSD00445

LED

LED (4x) M 12x1

LED

NSD00494b

M 12x1

SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)

54

69 55

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/237

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI600
Operating distances 10 and 15 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Ex Zone 2 4-wire M30 Flush 10 mm Brass, nickel-plated V 15 ... 34 mA 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) mA 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Hz 300 mm 0.3 ms 40 Yellow LED IP67 Ex Zone 2 4-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.4 40 Yellow LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Connector type Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 A 3RG40 140CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 140CD00-0XB0 Order No. 4 0.14 mm2 A 3RG40 240CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 240CD00-0XB0

With 2 m cable, PUR


NO contact and NC contact, pnp Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X

With M12 connector


NO contact and NC contact, pnp Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X A 3RG40 143CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 143CD00-0XB0 A 3RG40 243CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 243CD00-0XB0

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A 25 37 B 16
A 15
NSD00521

30

80

B 25

3RG40 140CD00
M 30x1,5
5

3RG40 143CD00
M 30x1,5 5

3RG40 240CD00
M 30x1,5 16

NSD00548

15

3RG40 243CD00
M 30x1,5 16

54

5 LED (4x) M 12x1 SW 36 58,5

54

SW 36 58,5

69 55

SW 36

NSD00518a

LED
NSD00519

LED (4x) Sg

NSD0_00544b

LED

SW 36

2/238

Siemens FS 10 2008

69
NSD00545b

55

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI600
Operating distances 15 and 35 mm

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H Power-up delay tv Switching status display Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection V mA mA Hz mm mm ms Ex Zone 2 4-wire Cubic 40 mm x 40 mm Flush 15 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30(24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 50 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67 Ex Zone 2 4-wire Cubic 40 mm x 40 mm Not flush 35 mm Molded plastic 15 ... 34 230 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 30 0.75 0.05 ... 7.7 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Order No. Order No.

With M12 connector


NO contact and NC contact, pnp Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X A 3RG40 383CD00-0XA0 A 3RG40 383CD00-0XB0 A 3RG41 483CD00-0XA0 A 3RG41 483CD00-0XB0

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A 25 75 B 30
A 15
NSD 01164
NSD 01166

80

160

B 90

3RG40 383CD00
LED
NSD 01163

3RG41 483CD00
LED
NSD 01163

40 46 55

69

40 46 55

40

30 40

5,3x7,3

M 12x1 40

30 40

5,3x7,3

M 12x1 40

69

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/239

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI900
Operating distance 3 mm, expl o sio n-pro o f to 500 b ar

I Tech nical specificatio ns


Cl ass N u mb er o f co ndu cto rs D esign I nstal l atio n in metal R ated o perating distance sn E nc lo su re ma teria l O p era tio na l vo lta g e (D C ) N o -lo a d su p p ly c u rrent I0 R a ted o p era tio na l c u rrent Ie Sw itc h ing freq u enc y f R ep ea t a c c u ra c y R P o w er-u p d ela y tv Sw itc h ing sta tu s d isp la y P rec a u tio ns Sp u rio u s sig na l su p p ressio n Sh o rt-c irc u it-p ro o f/o verlo a d -p ro o f R everse-p o la rity p ro tec tio n W ire-b rea k p ro tec tio n Ind u c tive interferenc e p ro tec tio n R a d io interferenc e p ro tec tio n D eg ree o f p ro tec tio n Typ e V mA mA H z mm ms P ressu re-resistant u p to 500 b ar 3-w ire M 14 Al mo st fl u sh 3 mm Sta inless steel, senso r su rfa c e a lu minu m o x id e c era mic 10 ... 3 0 10 200 5 00 0.1 10 IP 6 8 3 R G 4 6 5 2.P .00

I S electio n and Ordering data


Sw itc h ing o u tp u t C k t. d ia g . N o. 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 E,F F E,F F C o nnec - O rd er N o . to r ty p e 3 0.3 4 mm2 3R G 46 520P G 00 3R G 46 520P F 00 3R G 46 520P B 00 3R G 46 520PA 00 3R G 46 523P G 00 3R G 46 523P F 00 3R G 46 523P B 00 3R G 46 523PA 00

W ith 2 m cab l e, P U R
N O c o nta c t, p np N C c o nta c t, p np N O c o nta c t, np n N C c o nta c t, np n N O c o nta c t, p np N C c o nta c t, p np N O c o nta c t, np n N C c o nta c t, np n

W ith M 12 co nnecto r

I D imensio ns
M o u nting instru ctio ns
8 A 12 B

3 R G 4 6 5 20P .00
12 ,3

3 R G 4 6 5 23 P .00
12 ,3

30 18,6

30 18,6

M 14x 1,5
NSD0_ 00409a

M 14x 1,5

5 6 ,5

NSD00411

65

NSD0_ 00408a

A
SW 19

Sg

M 12 x 1 SW 19

A = a c tive su rfa c e B = meta l-free a rea X 2.4 mm w h en mo u nted in steel, X 1.2 mm w h en mo u nted in o th er meta l

2/ 240

Siemens FS 10 2008

Inductive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXI900
Operating distance 0 to 6 mm with analog output

I Technical specifications
Class Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Output voltage (A1) at 25 C With s = 0 mm With s = 3 mm With s = 6 mm L oad current at voltage output Output voltage (A2) at 25 C With s = 0 mm With s = 6 mm V mA Hz mm ms V V V Analog output 4-wire M12 Almost flush 0. . . 6 mm Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 1000 0.3 50 0 (0 ... + 0.2) + 2.7 ( 0.2) + 5.0 ( 0.2)

mA max. 10 mA 1.0 ( 0.2) mA 5.0 ( 0.2) 1 5 IP67 3RG46 12.NB00

M ax. resistive load at current output With Ub = 10 V k With Ub = 30 V Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type k

I Selection and Ordering data


Analog output Ckt. diag. No. 30 Connec- Order No. tor type 4 0.25 mm2 3RG46 120NB00

With 2 m cable, PUR


Voltage + current

With M12 connector


Voltage + current 30 F 3RG46 123NB00

I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
6 16 2 9

3RG46 120NB00
M 12x1 4

3RG46 123NB00
M 12x1
4

SW 17

50

NSD00488

60

NSD00485

Sg
NSD00486a

A = active surface B = metal-free area

SW 17

40

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/241

Capacitive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Capacitive proximity switches Monitoring fill levels and more
S tand ard s The same standards are applicable as for the inductive proximity switches. Type The BEROs are available in DC or AC versions: The DC versions can activate electronic controllers (SIMATIC) or relays directly. With the AC version, the load (contactor relay, solenoid valve) is connected directly to the AC supply network (preferably 230 V, 50 Hz) in series with the proximity switches. F u nction The sensing face of a capacitive sensor is formed by two concentrically arranged metal electrodes that are equivalent to the electrodes of an unwound capacitor. The electrode surfaces A and B are connected into the feedback branch of a highfrequency oscillator that is tuned such that it does not oscillate when the surface is free.

A+

Capacitive proximity switches are also non-contact sensors and respond to the same degree almost instinctively when conducting and non-conducting materials in solid, powder or liquid state are to be measured. They impress customers especially in the case of fill level monitoring through non-metallic materials such as plastic or glass and through various materials in the case of counting objects.

B-

H ig h lig h t s
Detection of all materials (e.g. plastics, wood, paper) Measurement of liquids through plastic tubes or glass pipes Measurement of aggressive chemicals Adjustable compensation of operating distance on the object

NSD0_00721

When an object approaches the active face of the sensor, it enters the electric field in front of the electrode surfaces and causes a change in the coupling capacitance. The oscillator starts to oscillate; the amplitude is recorded by an evaluation circuit and converted into a switching command. S w itch ing rate The build-up characteristics specific to other pulse/interval conditions may result in higher switching frequencies than those specified. O perating d istance The stated values are applicable to a target of metal which is grounded and whose area corresponds to the sensing face of the proximity switch. The real operating distance sr for non-conductive targets is dependent on the relative dielectric constant r and the characteristic value (see characteristic curve).
80

Application examples

er

60 40

Recognition of milk in cartons

20

1
NSD0_00722

20

40

60

80 % 100 sr

Level control for bulk material in vessel

2/242

Siemens FS 10 2008

Capacitive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Dielectric constants r of various materials
Material Alcohol Araldite Bakelite Glass Mica Vulcanized rubber Hard paper Wood Cable insulating compound Air, vacuum Marble Oiled paper Paper Paraffin Petroleum Plexiglas Polyamide

I Technical specifications
r
2.3 2.3 3 2.9 4.4 4 3.7 4.5 2.8 2 2.2 2.2 1 80 2.5 3 Type Operational voltage Residual ripple No-load supply current I0 Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Differential travel H Outputs Rated operational current Ie For DC For 230 V AC (contactor up to size S3) - Continuous - Momentary up to 20 ms Smallest operating current Im Mainly inductive load Mainly resistive load Residual current Ir Voltage drop Lead length, max. permissible Degree of protection Ambient temperature Operation Bearings Shock resistance Resistance to vibration DC 10 ... 65 (30) V Max. 10% 6 ... 12 mA 100 Hz Max. 2 % 0.02 ... 0.2 sr AC 20 ... 250 V max. 1.7 mA 20 Hz

r
25.8 3.6 3.6 5 6 4 4.5 2 ... 7 2.5 1 8 4 2.3 2.2 2.2 3.2 5

Material Polyethylene Polypropylene Polystyrene Polyvinylchloride Porcelain Pressboard Q uartz glass Q uartz sand Silicone rubber Teflon Turpentine oil Transformer oil Vacuum, air Water Soft rubber Celluloid

200 mA

500 mA 5A

10 mA 5 mA max. 1.7 mA Max 7 V

B uilt-in protection The protective circuits built into the DC versions make them easy to handle and protect the devices from damage. Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit and overload protection Reverse polarity protection of connections Inductive interference protection

6 ... 12 mA Max. 1.8 V 300 m IP67

-20 C +70 C -40 C +85 C 30 g, 11 ms duration 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude

I Schematics
DC
Fig. 1
BN L
E
NSD00726

AC
Fig. 3
BN L
E2
NSD00725

Fig. 5
BK WH BU
E1

K
NSD00723

BK BU

K
L

BN BU G NY E
E

L N P E/SL

Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves

Proximity switch activated Load E1 switched on (NO function) Load E2 switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves Fig. 4

Fig. 2
K
NSD00727

Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) or Load E switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves NO or NC function according to type Fig. 6
K
NSD00728

1 4 3
E

L
K
NSD00724

1 4 2 3
E1
E2

1/3 2/4

L1
E N(L2)

Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves

Proximity switch activated Load E1 switched on (NO function) Load E2 switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves

Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) or Load E switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves NO or NC function, programmable

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/243

Capacitive Proximity Switches


Introduction
Overview

S IM A T IC P X C 20 0

2
M 18
Operating distance 5 mm 10 mm 20 mm Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 250 V AC Number of wires 2-wire 3-wire 4-wire Output pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact and NC contact NO contact or NC contact Installation Flush Wiring Connector, 8 mm Cable Terminal compartment Degree of protection IP67 See page

M 30

40 m m

20 m m x 3 2 m m

40 m m x 40 m m


2/246


2/245, 2/246


2/245

2/245

2/246

2/244

Siemens FS 10 2008

Capacitive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXC200
10 ... 65 V DC

I Technical specifications
Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Effective operating distance sr Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie Displays Operating distance Operational voltage Degree of protection Type
1) 2)

3 M18 Flush 5 mm Adjustable Molded plastic 10 ... 65 200 Red LED IP67 3RG16 130AB00

3 Cubic 20 mm 32 mm Flush 5 mm Fixed comparison Metal 10 ... 30 200 Y ellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 73.AG00

4 M30 Flush 10 mm Adjustable Metal with molded-plastic head 10 ... 65 200 Red LED IP67 3RG16 140AC00

V mA

1) For operation with grounded metal. 2) With an alignment sr > sn the hysteresis can increase significantly.

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 1 3 Connector type Order No. 3 0.5 mm2 3RG16 130AB00 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 3RG16 730AG00 Order No. 4 0.34 mm2 3RG16 140AC00

With 2 m cable, L iY Y
NO contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp (antivalent) NC contact, pnp

With 8 mm connector
2 A, C 3RG16 737AG00

I Dimensions
3RG16 130AB00
M 18x1

3RG16 730AG00
20 3 32 8
NSD00741

3RG16 140AC00
M 30x1,5

LED
SW 24 60 70

13
NSD0_00736a

4,3
NSD0_00729a

3RG16 737AG00
2,5

20 3 32

8
NSD00742

LED

3,4 13 4,3

I Characteristic curves
y m m
NSD00740

y m m
NSD00744

4 3 2 1 -x m m 8 4 0 4 8 +x m m

4 3 2 1 -x m m 8 4 0 4 8 +x m m

8 6 4 2 -x m m 8 4 0 4 8 +x m m

Standard target: Metal, 20 mm 20 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

Standard target: Metal, 20 mm 20 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

Standard target: Metal, 30 mm 30 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

NSD00733

y m m 10

81

3,4

SW 36 61

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/245

Capacitive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXC200
10 ... 65 V DC

I Technical specifications
Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Effective operating distance sr Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie Displays Operating distance Operational voltage Degree of protection Type
1) 2)

4 M30 Flush 10 mm Adjustable Molded plastic 10 ... 65 200 Yellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 146AC00

4 40 mm Flush 20 mm Adjustable Molded plastic 10 ... 65 200 Yellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 556AC00

4 Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm Adjustable Molded plastic 10 ... 65 200 Yellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 306AC00

V mA

1) For operation with grounded metal. 2) With an alignment sr > sn the hysteresis can increase significantly.

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 4 Connector type Order No. U p to 2.5 mm2 3RG16 146AC00 Order No. U p to 2.5 mm2 3RG16 556AC00 Order No. U p to 2.5 mm2 3RG16 306AC00

With terminal box


NO contact and NC contact, pnp (antivalent)

I Dimensions
3RG16 146AC00
M 30x1,5

3RG16 556AC00
40

3RG16 306AC00
40
NSD0_00567a

34

SW 36 61

55

7,3 5,3

30

90

46
115

LED
NSD00731

LED
NSD00730

LED 5,3

Pg 9

Pg 9

60

114

Pg 13,5

16

Fixing clamp, 40 mm, included in scope of supply.

I Characteristic curves
NSD00733 NSD00735

8 6 4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4 8

16 12 8 4

16 12 8 4

+x mm

-x 16 mm

16 +x mm

-x 16 mm

16 +x mm

Standard target: Metal, 30 mm 30 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

2/246

Siemens FS 10 2008

NSD00734

y mm 10

y mm 20

y mm 20

Capacitive Proximity Switches


SIMATIC PXC200
AC 20 bis 250 V

I Technical specifications
Number of conductors Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn Effective operating distance sr Enclosure material
1) 2)

2 + PE M30 Flush 10 mm Adjustable Metal with molded-plastic head 20 ... 250 500 Red LED

2 40 mm Flush 20 mm Adjustable Molded plastic

2 Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm Adjustable Molded plastic

Molded plastic

Operational voltage (AC) Rated operational current Ie Displays Operating distance Operational voltage Degree of protection Type

V mA

20 ... 250 500 Red LED Green LED Red LED Green LED

20 ... 250 500 Red LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 306LD00

IP67 IP67 3RG16 140LB00, 3RG16 146LD00 3RG16 556LD00 3RG16 140LA00

1) For operation with grounded metal. 2) With an alignment sr > sn the hysteresis can increase significantly.

I Selection and Ordering data


Switching output Ckt. diag. No. 5 5 6 Connector type Order No. 3 0.5 mm2 3RG16 140LB00 3RG16 140LA00 Up to 2.5 mm2 3RG16 146LD00 Up to 2.5 mm2 3RG16 556LD00 Up to 2.5 mm2 3RG16 306LD00 Order No. Order No.

With 2 m cable, LiYY


NO contact NC contact NO contact or NC contact programmable

With terminal box

I Dimensions
M 30x1,5
SW 36 61 55
NSD0_00567a

3RG16 14 0LB00, 3RG16 140LA00

3RG16 146LD00
M 30x1,5

3RG16 556LD00
40

3RG16 306LD00
40 34

SW 36 61 81

115

Pg 9 Pg 9
NSD00730

LED 5,3

NSD0_00729a

60

LED

NSD00731

114

LED

7,35,3

90

30

46

LED

Fixing clamp, 40 mm, included in scope of supply.

Pg 13,5

16

I Characteristic curves
NSD00733

8 6 4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4 8

NSD00734

16 12 8 4

16 12 8 4

+x mm

-x 16 mm

16 +x mm

-x 16 mm

16 +x mm

Standard target: Metal, 30 mm 30 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground

NSD00735

y mm 10

y mm 20

y mm 20

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/247

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Connectors

I Selection and Ordering data


Fig. 1
8,3 30,5 29

Length Color m 8 mm cable plugs for snap-on mounting, degree of protection IP6 3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 1 1 A A B B PUR PUR PUR PUR 5 10 5 10 Black Black Black Black

Fig.

Type1)

Cable2)

Order No.

3RX 8 000-0BH 32-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BH 32-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BH 42-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BH 42-1AL0

Fig. 2
6 20

4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 1 1

8,3

16,2

8 mm angular cable plugs for snap-on mounting, degree of protection IP65 3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 2 A A PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR 5 10 5 10 5 Black Black Black Black B 3RX 8 000-0BJ32-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BJ32-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BJ42-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BJ42-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BJ34-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BJ34-1AL0 2
20

Fig. 3
6 8,3

4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 2 B 2 B C

16,2

3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2; with 2 LEDs for pnp proximity switches 3 Black/ clear 3 C PUR 10 Black/ clear M8 cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67
30,5 22,5

Fig. 4
8 10

3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 4 4 5 A A A A PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black Black Black 3RX 8 000-0BB32-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BB32-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BB35 3RX 8 000-0BB37

M8x1

Fig. 5
11,6 37 32 M8x1

6
<5

Coupling plug with soldering pins, max. 0.25 mm2 Coupling plug with screw connection PUR PUR 5 10

12

4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 4 4 5 B B B B Black Black Black Black 3RX 8 000-0BB42-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BB42-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BB45 3RX 8 000-0BB47

Fig. 6
c a. 45 38,1 12 M8x1

Coupling plug with soldering pins, max. 0.25 mm2 Coupling plug with screw connection

Fig. 7
6 8,3 20

M8 angular cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67 3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 7
M8x1

A A A

PUR PUR

5 10

Black Black Black

3RX 8 000-0BC32-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BC32-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BC35

7 8

16,5

Coupling plug with soldering pins, max. 0.25 mm2 PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR 5 (pnp) 10 5 (npn) 10 5 10

10

Fig. 8
<5 12,5

3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, with LEDs 9 C 9 9 9 C D D

Black Black Black Black Black Black Black

3RX 8 000-0BC34-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BC34-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BC30-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BC30-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BC42-1AF0 3RX 8 000-0BC42-1AL0 3RX 8 000-0BC45

28

4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 7 B


M8x1 11,6 12

7 8

B B

Fig. 9
6 8 20

Coupling plug with soldering pins, max. 0.25 mm2

M8x1 16,5

10

Cable plugs with special lengths available as options: Minimum order quantity: 50 units Delivery time on request. Extra charge per m.

1) 2)

For terminal assignment, see page 2/253. PUR cables suitable for trailing.

B: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99

2/248

Siemens FS 10 2008

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Connectors
Length Color Approvals m M12 cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67 3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 10 10
10,3

Fig.

Type1)

Cable2)

Order No.

Fig. 10
42,7 39,7 23,9 1,5
M12x1

E E E E
2

PUR PUR PUR, shielded PUR, shielded PUR PUR

5 10 2 10

Black Black Black Black

UL, CSA UL, CSA

3RX8 000-0CB32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CB32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CB32-1GC0 3RX8 000-0CB32-1GL0

11 11

Fig. 11
43 30 12 1,5
M12x1 13,5

8,8

4-pole, 4 0.34 mm 10 10 12 F F F

5 10

Black Black Black

UL, CSA UL, CSA

3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CB45

13

Fig. 12
ca. 54 20 M12x1

Coupling plug with terminal compartment, pre-assembly possible Coupling plug with quick-connection technology PUR PUR 5 10

Black

UL

3RX8 000-0CB47

5-pole, 5 0.34 mm2 10 10 11 G G G G G Black Black Black Black Black UL, CSA UL, CSA 3RX8 000-0CB52-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CB52-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CB52-1GF0 3RX8 000-0CB52-1GL0 3RX8 000-0CB55

Fig. 13
ca. 53 M12x1

11 12
SW

PUR, 5 shielded PUR, 10 shielded Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassemble possible 5

8-pole, 8 0.25 mm2 11 O PUR, shielded Cable plugs with special lengths available as options: Minimum order quantity: 50 units Delivery time on request. Extra charge per m. 1) For terminal assignment, see page 2/253.
2)

Black

3RX8 000-0CB81-1GF0

PUR cables suitable for trailing.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/249

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Connectors
Fig. Fig. 14
26,5 12

Type1)

Cable2)

Length m

Color

Approvals

Order No.

M12 angular cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2,
12 <6

14 14 14 14

E E E E H H H H H

PUR PUR PVC PVC PUR PUR PVC PVC

5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10

Black Black Black Black Black Black Orange Orange

UL, CSA UL, CSA

3RX8 000-0CC32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC32-1BF0 3RX8 000-0CC32-1BL0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1BF0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1BL0 3RX8 000-0CC36

Fig. 15
26,5 12

1,5

M12x1

3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, with LEDs for pnp proximity switches, NO contact only3)
12 1,5
M12x1 1

15 15 15 15 16
14,8

Fig. 16

35 25

Coupling plug with terminal compartment, pre-assembly possible 3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, with LEDs for pnp proximity switches, NO or NC3) 15 J PUR 5 Black 15 J F F F PUR PUR PUR 10 5 10 Black Black Black Black UL, CSA UL, CSA 4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2

3RX8 000-0CC38-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC38-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC45

M12x1 20

14 14 16

Fig. 17
20,8

Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassembly possible 4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2, mit LEDs3) 15 K K K PUR PUR 5 10 15 16

43 31

Black Black clear

UL, CSA UL, CSA

3RX8 000-0CC44-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC44-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC46

17

M18x1 25,5

With terminal compartment, transparent for LEDs LED insert for angular cable plug, transparent 5 10

3RX8 000-0CA06

5-pole, 5 0.34 mm2 14 G PUR 14 16 G G PUR

Black Black

3RX8 000-0CC52-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC52-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC55

Black Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassembly possible M18 angular cable plugs for screw-type mounting, degree of protection IP65, 4-pole 17 F Preassembly possible, with terminal compartment Black

3RX8 000-0DC45

Cable plugs with special lengths available as options: Minimum order quantity: 50 units Delivery time on request. Extra charge per m. 1) For terminal assignment, see page 2/253.
2) 3)

PUR cables suitable for trailing. Only limited use of sonar proximity switches.

A: Subject to export regulations: AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H

2/250

Siemens FS 10 2008

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Connectors
Length m M8 coupling plugs, degree of protection IP67 For extension cable (metal union nut) with screw-type connection 18 18 Fig. 19
M12x1

Fig.

Type1)

Cable2)

Color

Approvals

Order No.

Fig. 18
M8x1 ca. 50 42,7

12

3-pole 4-pole

Black Black

3RX8 000-0BD37 3RX8 000-0BD47

M12 coupling plugs, degree of protection IP67 for extension cable (metal union nut) with terminal compartment, screw-type terminal max. 0.75 mm cable gland max. 6 mm 19 19
60

20

L M L

4-pole 5-pole 4-pole

Black Black UL

3RX8 000-0CD45 3RX8 000-0CD55 3RX8 000-0CD47

Fig. 20
1 56

Quick Black connection method M12 angled coupling plug, degree of protection IP67 for extension cable (metal union nut) with terminal compartment, screw-type terminal max. 0.75 mm cable gland max. 6 mm 21 21
14,8

20

M 12 x 1

Fig. 21
20,5

L M

4-pole 5-pole

Black Black

3RX8 000-0CE45 3RX8 000-0CE55

For AS-Interface, degree of protection IP67


M12 cable plugs 4 0.34 mm2 (union nut of metal) 22 L L PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black UL, CSA UL, CSA 3RX8 000-0CD42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CD42-1AL0

41

M12x1 20

22

Fig. 22
1 M12 x 1

46,5 43,5 27,7


10,3

M12 angular cable plug 4 0.34 mm2 (union nut of metal) 23 23 L L PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black 3RX8 000-0CE42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CE42-1AL0

Fig. 23
3 8 ,8

3 1

NSD01005

14 , 5

Fig. 24
M 12 x 1 10 19,5 1

8,8

Flush-type M12 connector Adapter with single cores, 4-pole with single cores 24 24 Twistable Not twistable 0.5 0.2 3RX8 000-0CA40-1JA5 3RX8 000-0CA40-1JA2

13

SW23

"L"

M 20 x 1,5
F S10_00134

26

Cable plugs with special lengths available as options: Minimum order quantity: 50 units Delivery time on request. Extra charge per m. 1) For terminal assignment, see page 2/253. 2) PUR cables suitable for trailing.

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/251

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Connectors
1

Design

Type1)

Conductor cross-section/ color 3 0.34 mm2, black

Length

Order No.

M12x1 14,5

41,5 14,5

M12x1

42

Cable with M12 socket E, L and M12 plug Connection to 3RX8 000-0JA0 distributor (metal union nut), PUR cable Caution: Only terminal 4 (NO) is connected. F, L

m 0.6 1 1.5

3RX8 000-0GF32-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5

2
9,7 30,5 M8x1

4 0.34 mm2, black 3 0.34 mm2, black

0.6 1 1.5 0.6 1 1.5

3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 3RX8 000-0FF32-1AA6 3RX8 000-0FF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0FF32-1AB5

M12x1

41,5

Cable with M8 socket and M12 A, L plug Connection to 3RX8 000-0JA0 distributor (metal union nut), PUR cable Caution: Only terminal 4 (NO) is connected. B, L

14,5

4 0.34 mm2, black 3 0.34 mm2, black

0.6 1 1.5 1 2

3RX8 000-0FF42-1AA6 3RX8 000-0FF42-1AB0 3RX8 000-0FF42-1AB5 3RX8 000-0EF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0EF32-1AC0

9,7

30,5 M8x1

Cable with M8 socket and M8 plug, PUR cable

37

10

20 16,6

Cable with M8 angular socket and M8 plug, PUR cable

3 0.34 mm2, black

1 2

3RX8 000-0EG32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0EG32-1AC0

M8x1 9,7 10

M8x1

37

Cable, 20 m, black According to the number of cores, the cables can be used for all inductive proximity switches, sonar proximity switches and optical proximity switches. PUR PUR PUR, shielded T-distributor, M12 plug connection For connection of thru-beam sensors to AS-Interface modules

3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm2

3RX8 000-0K A32-1AR0 3RX8 000-0K A42-1AR0 3RX8 000-0K A42-1GR0 3RX8 000-0JA20

NSD0102 9

1)

For terminal assignment, see page 2/253.

2/252

Siemens FS 10 2008

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Connectors

I Schematics
Plug connections Type A, E
1 4 3
NSD01032a

Type B, F, L, N, P
BN (L ) BK (NO ) BU (L )
1 4 2 3
NSD0_01033a

Type B, F, L, N, P
BN (L ) BK (NO o r Se n d ) WH (NC o r R e c) BU (L )

Type C, H
(L+) (En ab le o r NC ) (L) (En ab le o r NO o r an alo g o u tp u t)

1 2 3 4
NSD0_01034a

BN WH BU BK

1 4
GN YN

BN (L+) BK (NO )

3
NSD01035a

BU (L)

with normally open contact

proximity switches with NC/NO contact Type G, M

sonar proximity switches in M18 compact series Type J

proximity switches with NO contact, pnp Type K

Type D
1
GN YE

BN (L+)

1 2 3 4 5
NSD0_01037a

BN (L+) WH (En ab le o r NC ) BU (L-) BK (En ab le o r NO ) (An alo g o u tp u t) GR

1 4 YE GN

BN (L+ ) BK (NO o r NC )

1 4
YE GN

BN (L+) BK (NO )

4 3
NSD01036a

BK (NO ) BU (L)

3 2
NSD0_01038a

BU (L)

3 2
NSD01039a

BU (L) WH (NC )

proximity switches with NO contact, npn

proximity switches with NC/NO contact, sonar proximity switches M30 K2 and M30 K3 compact series

proximity switch with NC or NO contact, pnp

proximity switch with NO contact or NC/NO contact, pnp

Type O
2 1 5 6 8 4 3 7
FS10_00139

BN (L+) WH (R S485) GR (R S485) PK R D YE GN BU (L)

PXO530/540 proximity switch BN = Brown BK = Black WH = White Pin assignment

BU = Blue GR = Gray GN = Green

YE = Yellow PK = Pink RD = Red

M8 connection for cable plugs and angled cable plugs Type A, C, D


4 3
FS10_00140

M12 connection for cable plugs and angled cable plugs Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Type G, M
3 5
2 1
FS10_00142

Type B
4 2 1
FS10_00141

4 1
FS10_00143

Type O
5 4 3 2 8 1
FS10_00144

6 7

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/253

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Distributors

I Technical specifications
Type Operational voltage V DC Max. current per switching output A Connections Core identification, PUR cable Display Per output Operational voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Operating temperature C 3RX8 000-0JA 24 2 M12 plug-in connections (socket in distribution unit) in color Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic IP65, in inserted and locked state -15 ... +80

I Selection and Ordering data


Type Distribution units, q uadruple 5 m PUR line 10 m PUR line Distribution units, 6x 5 m PUR line
0 a

Approvals

Order No.

UL UL UL UL UL UL

3RX8 000-0JA40-1AF0 3RX8 000-0JA40-1AL0 3RX8 000-0JA60-1AF0 3RX8 000-0JA60-1AL0 3RX8 000-0JA80-1AF0 3RX8 000-0JA80-1AL0 3RX8 000-0JA80

10 m PUR line Distribution units, 8x 5 m PUR line 10 m PUR line Distributors Preassembly possible, with connecting hood

M a A A= = Dimension 8 2 ay ( 4 distribution - f a c h V e r t e unit) i l e r ) 82 (4-w 1 0 0 ay ( 6 distribution - f a c h V e r t e unit) i l e r ) 100 (6-w 127 (8-w 1 2 7 ay ( 8 distribution - f a c h V e r t e unit) i l e r )

I Schematics
Sock ets for M 12 round plugs Sw itch ing outputs
1 4 1 5

Sock et 1

ye
1-6 (6-w ay distribution unit) 1-8 (8-w ay distribution unit)
3 4 4 1 5 3 2

Sock et 2

ye
3 2
L-

7 (6-w ay distribution unit) 9 (8-w ay distribution unit)


L+

4 1 5

Sock et 3

gn

ye
3 2

8 (6-w ay distribution unit) 10 (8-w ay distribution unit)


P E

4 1 5

Sock et 4

ye
3 2

NSD0_01031a

2/254

Siemens FS 10 2008

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Sensors assembly system

I Overview

I Dimensions
6, 4 55 6, 4

22

2
22 6, 4 12 6, 4
FS10_00181

Mounting base 3RX7 322

50

31, 5

Sensors assembly system

I Selection and Ordering data


Order No.

3, 5

5, 5 12

Sensors assembly system Mounting base for sensors assembly system, with 12 mm hole for inserting round rod Holding plate for sensors assembly system, for mounting on 12 mm round rod, suitable for all cubic proximity switches Round rod for sensors assembly system, 12 mm diameter 200 mm long 300 mm long
3RX7 315 3RX7 316 3RX7 322
72

Consisting of:

3RX7 326
FS10_00182

Holding plate 3RX7 326 for accommodating cubical sensors

Siemens FS 10 2008

2/255

Proximity Switches
Accessories
Assembly materials

I S electio n an d O rd erin g d ata


Typ e 3 2SX 6 281 bis 3 SX 6 284
f d g
N S D 01021

O rder N o .

F ixin g clamp (mo lded p lastic, su p p lied w ith o u t fix ing screw s) fo r p ro x imity sw itch es w ith th read M 8 3 SX 6 281 3 SX 6 282 3 SX 6 283 a b c d e f g 26 22 11.6 3 .5 16 12.6 7 .9 (fo r M 8) 36 30 18 4 .5 24 18.5 11.9 (fo r M 12) 45 30 26 4 .5 32 19 .6 18.0 (fo r M 18) 3 SX 6 284 58 30 36 4 .5 44 19 .6 29 .8 (fo r M 3 0) M 12 M 18 M 30

3S X 6 281 3S X 6 282 3S X 6 283 3S X 6 284

3 SX 9 9 10

Ad ap ter fro m P g 13 .5 to N P T , fo r p ro x imity sw itch es w ith P g 13 .5 co nnecting th read Ad ap ter fro m M 20 x 1.5 to N P T , fo r p ro x imity sw itch es w ith M 20 co nnecting th read M o ld ed p lastic M 20 1. 5 screw ed j o in t 6 mm lo ng, w ith seal, fo r p ro x imity sw itch es w ith M 20 co nnecting th read Alig n men t p late fo r cu bic p ro x imity sw itch es 3 R G 16 3 0, 3 R G 4 0 3 0, 3 R G 4 0 3 1, 3 R G 4 0 3 4 , 3 R G 4 0 4 1, 3 R G 4 1 3 1, 3 R G 4 1 4 1, 3R G 46 31
3 0 3 0

3S X 9 910

3S X 9 918

3S B 39 010C K

3 R X 1 3 03
2 5

3R X 1 303

3 0

1 0 0 7 0

5,5
N S D 0 1 0 23

4 0

3 R X 1 3 04
4 0 3 0 5,2 1 4
N S D 0 1 0 24

6 0

1 3 6 0 9 0 20

M o u n tin g bracket Fo r snap p ing o nto C -sh ap ed rails, can slide u p to 20 mm length w ise, ro tatable th ro u gh 3 6 0 , fo r cu bic p ro x imity sw itch es 3 R G 16 3 0, 3 R G 4 0 3 0, 3 R G 4 0 3 1, 3 R G 4 0 3 4 , 3 R G 4 0 4 1, 3 R G 4 1 3 1, 3 R G 4 1 4 1, 3R G 46 31

3R X 1 304

N S D 00954

3 ,2 6

M etal su p p o rt fo r fiber-o p tic cables an d lead s fo r 7 mm fo r 8 mm fo r 10 mm Smaller diameters o n req u est 3R X 7 943 3R X 7 944 3R X 7 945

B A

8 16 A 3 ,5 4,5 20 B 20 6 20 7 25

M 3 12 8 25 10 25

7
2/ 256
Siemens FS 10 2008